HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5247 - Contract - Mike Klein General Contractors Inc - LMCC Renovations - 08_22_1996RESOLUTION NO.5247
August 22, 1996
Item #22
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to
execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract with Mike Klein General
Contractors, Inc. of Lubbock, Texas, to furnish and install all materials and services as bid for the
Lubbock Memorial Civic Center Renovations, attached hereto and which shall be spread upon
the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be
a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail.
Passed by the City Council this
ATTEST:
arold Willard
Interim City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
4
Victor Kilman, P hasing anager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
Defiald G. V
Attorney
DGV:js/K-MKGCI_RES
ccdocs/August 12, 1996
0
r
r
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATIONS
BID #13641
CITY OF UB B O K
� C
N
et
N
Lubbock, Texas
N
I
F
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INVITATION TO BID
FOR
TITLE: LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATIONS
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 13641
PROJECT NUMBER: 9119.9211
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
INDEX
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
PAYMENT BOND
PERFORMANCE BOND
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACT
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIAL CONDITION
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
r
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID #13641
Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the
office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00
!^ o'clock p.m. on the 6th day of August. 1996, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to
furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
"LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATIONS"
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the
Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud.
~" It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office! of the Purchasing Manager
for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 22nd day of August, 1996, at the Municipal Building, 1625
i 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or
all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance
with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract
price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter
2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or su erior, as the
rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest resaonsible bidder.
i
I:
I
r
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a
guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of
award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local
conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been
thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on
25th day of July, 1996, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Training Room L-01, Lubbock, Texas
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which
document is specifically referred to In this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of
Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and
payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response
to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in
consideration for an award.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings
and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in
a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at
(806) 767-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
CITY OF LUBB K
ICTO L N
PURCHASIN MANAGER
Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street,
Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806)767-2167/Fax (806)767-2164.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
r
r-�
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to
r. complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER
RENOVATIONS.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General
Conditions.
All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the
construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by
said contract documents.
{ 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
�- It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by
the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without
charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice
to Bidders.
r
r
4. BIDDER INQUIRIES
No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification
concerning this bid must be addressed to:
RON SHUFFIELD
SENIOR BUYER
CITY OF LUBBOCK
P.O. BOX 2000
LUBBOCK, TX 79457
FAX (806)767-2164
5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 150 (ONE HUNDRED
FIFTY) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock
to the successful bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the
City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the
contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by
the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may
direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within
the time specified.
11
6. PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the
contract documents.
i
7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to
execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the
improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims
pending, of which the Contractor has been notified.
8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will
be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until
incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods
set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to
procure a satisfactory project.
GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective
materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall fumish to the Owner, a written
general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any
and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year
from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the
Owner (City of Lubbock).
10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use
during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or
others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor_
11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any
and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the
date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have
been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by
the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of
Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the
materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
a,
7
7,
13.
14.
15.
16.
17
PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a
way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or
other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the
project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the
location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or
damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired
immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals,
and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be
necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs,
and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and
replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of
barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
EXPLOSIVES
The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from
the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume
full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all
cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost: care so as not to endanger
life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms,
or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract,
it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground)
in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given
sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their
property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage
resulting from his blasting operations.
CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the
work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and
telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated
by this contract is in progress.
INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All
policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all
subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from
the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted.
18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than
specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders'
attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for
the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of
the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the
Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract
requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary
service to its citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort
to complete the contract within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must
notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires
to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on
whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's
Representative.
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this
contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work,
regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer
dangerous to property or life.
19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without
discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site
of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's
Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each
employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit
shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as
shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor
must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate
of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents.
The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars
for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer,
workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the
schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents.
20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the
bidder without being considered.
21. PREPARATION FOR BID
The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly
filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work
contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or
a
t
typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price
written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly
f^ authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each
member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly
authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business
address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing
agents or others to sign bids must be property certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The
bid shall be executed in ink.
Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed
on the outside of the envelope in the following manner.
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Bid for (description of the project).
Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no
bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the
following:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Submittal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(1) Insurance Certificates.
0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified
therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order
to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidders qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable
investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the
bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of
Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to
satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is property qualified to cant' out the obligations of the contract and to
complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include:
1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required.
2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or, within the time specified,
without delay or interference.
3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder.
4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
is
i
lam. LL- � �-
r r
Y
4 -
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
t
LACE:
P
DATE: August 6, 1996
7ROJECT NUMBER: 13641 - LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATIONS
Bid of Mike Klein General Contractors, Inc. (hereinafter called Bidder)
7To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a
Lubbock Memorial Civic Center Renovations
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related
contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents,
-within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the
work required under the contract documents.
rBASE BID ITEM 1: Work includes, but is not limited to, all materials, labor, demolition and installation of the following:
1 d New tufted carpet, New Axminster carpet (material by owner), New banquet hall ceiling, Patchwork and painting, New
wood paneling, New wallcovering, New light Fixtures, New Mechanical supply and return air grilles, New doors, New
fabric wrapped panels, New signage, New draperies and stage curtains, New motorized shades, New motorized
projection screens, New exit signs, New faucets, New toilet room accessories, Removal of existin vinyl wallcovering and
preparing wall surface for new paint finish.
0.0
I : MATERIALS:_ 1 J_�C_d —4 ! tr 1 �vl Q^} (� �� D ��
SERVICES: LA K- I i
TOTAL BASE BID ITEM 1:
f
17
L c U tr1 ($ 1�
f(1 Ono red 4 50�
4+icu-5oKL6f
ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO. 1: OPERABLE PANEL PARTITION REFURBISHMENT
Remove and replace existing wallcovering on the operable partitions in the Banquet Hall as indicated in Specification
Section 10 651 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
MATERIALS: ($
c n
7SERVICES:nu--it �� Jan
TOTAL ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO 1: Q i COO Add )
i
r
ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO.2: MOTORIZED SHADES
r 'Provide materials, delivery and installation of Motorized Shades as indicated in the Drawings and Specification Section
{ i12 520 MOTORIZED SHADES
71ATERIALS: C>-
SERVICES k )e-(047 I `4K2X.)r 44-)CU "QI'id-
TOTAL ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO
• - • �•J/ tii•GW1lt��� ilr, W aw �IJ:I'iL,t�;:Q
rr ►.�� ���__� � �l� �•�-- - /fit`-'
(I,%'�Ii L: P•� �i: !- I� t�L• },i.�r rf it �i �,\`J`
Jnd
7kLTERNATE BID ITEM NO.4: RECESSED MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREEN - BANQUET HALL (Listed as
Alternate No. 8 in specifications -section 01 030-2)
,_Remove and replace all exiting with new, recessed motorized projection screens in sizes to match existing.
x
MATERIALS: — ($ '-`Q
FSERVICES: I e'/
TOTAL ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO 4:
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
F"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 150 (ONE HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive
calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees
�pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar
day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general
conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
I ON
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
�^ The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work
r„ on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
i,
■
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check Issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less. than five percent (5% ) of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter Into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if
required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
j Enclosed with this bid Is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for 5% greatest amount bid
t Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of _ Dollars ($ ),
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by
the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the
i
Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check
or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.
rBidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Au Signature �----.
�r
Mike Klein, President
(Printed or Typed Name)
Mike Klein General Contractors, Inc.
Company
1340 E. 44th Street
r
Address
Lubbock, _ " -'.,Lubbock
City, County
Texas 79404
r"
_,
State Zip Code
Telephone: 806 _ 747-4739
Fax: 806
(Seal if Bidder Is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
Secretary
�r
17
4
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Minority Owned
Yes No
None Known. 0 0
0 ❑
0 ❑
❑ 0
0 0
❑ ❑
0 0
0 ❑
0 0
0 0
i
t
_,.. Installation of Owner Furnished Items
Axminster Carpet is Owner Furnished for material and delivery to job premises. Contractor Costs for
rec;eivillg, inspection, handling, storage and installation are to be included in the Base Bid. The Bidder shall
visit the job premises and, based upon "as built conditions" for locations to receive Axminster Carpet per the
r Contract Documents, estimate the total material quantity required for the carpet installation, including waste,
for each Axminster Carpet type and submit the following completed schedule:
SGI IEDULE FOR BIDDER'S ESTIMATED QUANTITIES
Bidder to complete the following Schedule using the Bidder's material quantities required for project Including material for installation,
replacement stock, testing. Bidder to furnish Unit and Total Cost to Include costs for receiving, handling, storage and installation of Owner
Furnished Material. ( this schedule does not include material costs for Owner Furnished Material):
CARPET TYPE
BIDDER'S
5%
Additional
TOTAL
BIDDER'S
BIDDER'S
Total Material
Replacement
Materlal for
Sq. Yds.
UNIT PRICE
EXTENDED
Quantities
Stock
Testing
FOR
per Sq. Yd. for
TOTAL COST
For Installation,
PROJECT
Receiving,
Square Yards
Including Waste
(Square
12 Ft. x 12 Ft.
Inspection,
x Unit Cost
(Square Yards)
Yards)
(Square Yards)
Handling,
Storage and
Installation
G-1 Pedestrian
16
$
$
Mall
C-2 Solid
16
$
$
Border
C-3 Banquet
16
$
$
Hall- A
C-4 Banquet
16
$
$
Hall- B
C-5 Banquet
16
$
$
Hall- C
C-6 Carpet Base
16
$
$
TOTAL
96
$
$
NOTE: IF SUCCESSFUL BIDDER, I WILL FURNISH THE INFORMATION REQUESTED ABOVE
AFTER VERIFICATION FROM SUCCESSFUL SUB —BIDDER.
0
r AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
NEW YORK, NEW YORK
:• NO: BONE
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, MIKE KLEIN GENERAL
CONTRACTORS, INC. as principal, and the American National Fire Insurance Company, a
corporation existing under the laws of the State of New York, having its principal place of
business at 580 Walnut Street, Cincinnati, Ohio, as surety, are held and firmly bound unto,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
as obligee, in the penal sum of 5 % OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID DOLLARS ($ 5 %
GAB), lawful money of the United States of America, for the payments of which, well and truly
to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
SIGNED, sealed and dated this 6th day of August 1996.
WHEREAS, the principal is herewith -submitting. a proposal for
LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATION
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if the said principal
shall be awarded the said contract, and shall within thirty (30) days after receiving notice of such
aware enter into a contract and give bond for the faithful performance of the contract, then this
obligation shall be null and void otherwise the principal and surety will pay unto the obligee the
difference in money between the amount of the principal's bid and the amount for which the
obligee may legally contract with another party to perform the work, if the latter amount be in
excess of the former; but in no event shall the liability hereunder exceed the penal sum hereof.
MIKE KLEIN GENERAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
By:
KLEIN Principal
AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
GENE HOLT Attorney -in -Fact
I
d
r AR ERICAN NANIONAL. FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
New York, New York
Administrative Office: 580 WALNUT STREET • CINCINNATI, OHIO 45202.613-369-5000 • FAX 513-723-2740
The number of persons authorized by
this power of attorney is not more than No. 0 15914
ONE POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation
organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of New York, does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint the person or
persons named below its true and lawful attorney -in -fact, for it and in its name, place and stead to execute in behalf of the said Company, as surety,
any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof; provided that the liability of the said
Company on any such bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall not exceed the limit stated below.
Name Address Limit of Power
CAI t • t YD11• 1 1 1 DR
This Power of Attorney revokes all previous powers issued in behalf of the attomey(s)-in-fact named above.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed and
attested by its appropriate officers and its corporate seal hereunto affixed this 5th day of October , 19 95
�.. Attest AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
STATE OF OHIO, COUNTY OF HAMILTON — ss:
On this 5th day of October, 1995 , before me personally appeared GARY T. DUNBAR, to me
known, being duly sworn, deposes and says that he resided in Cincinnati, Ohio, that he is the President of the Bond Division of American National
Fire Insurance Company, the Company described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal; that it was so affixed by
authority of his office under the By -Laws of said Company, and that he signed his name thereto by like authority.
l
This Power of Attorney is granted by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of American
National Fire Insurance Company by unanimous written consent dated July 27, 1995.
RESOLVED: That the Division President, the several Division Vice Presidents and Assistant Vice Presidents, or anyone of them, be
�., and herebyis authorized, from time to time, to appoint one ormore Attorneys -In -Fact to execute on behalf of the Company, as surety, anyand all
bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof, • to prescribe their respective duties and the
respective limits of their authority, and to revoke any such appointment at any time.
RESOLVED FURTHER: That the Company seal and the signature of any of the aforesaid officers and any Secretary or Assistant
! Secretary of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certificate of either given for the execution of any bond,
undertaking, contract orsuretyship, or other written obligation in the nature thereof, such signature and seal when so used being hereby adopted by
the Company as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the
same force and effect as though manually affixed.
r CERTIFICATION
I, RONALD C. HAYES, Assistant Secretary of American National Fire Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of
Attorney and the Resolutions of the Board of Directors of July 27, 1995 have not been revoked and are now in full force and effect.
Signed and sealed this 6th day of ALWA , 19 96
r�
S 1030M (8/95)
PAYMENT BOND
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING rl�.
LICE tkS 0 EXAS
DATE BYL-
FAMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
I" Bond No. 1309230
f
t
TEXAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND
,., (PUBLIC WORK)
` KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that MIKE KLEIN GENERAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
(hereinafter called the Principal(s)), as Principal(s), and AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY a corporation,
organized and existing under the laws of the State of New York, with its principal office in the City of Cincinnati, Ohio
(hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE -MILLION -THREE -HUNDRED -EIGHT -THOUSAND AND 00/100***
Dollars ($ *****1 , 388, 000.00* ******* )
for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors,
t successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 22nd
day of August , 19 96 to
LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATION
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants
supplying labor and materials to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this
obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government
Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions; of said Chapter to the same
extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal(s) and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
22nd day of August .19 96. MIKE KLEIN GENERAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
BY; L_
> e Klein President 701inciP0
(Principe!)
(Principe!)
i COUNTERSIGNED: AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
BY By
` Resident Agent Irene Holt Attorney -in -Fact
S-1115C 01 /95)
A NERIGA N NATIONAL., FIRE INSURANCE DOMPANY
New York, New York
Administrative Office: 680 WALNUT STREET a CINCINNATI, OHIO 45202 . 613-369-5000 a FAX 513-723-2740
The number of persons authorized by
this power of attorney is not more than No. 0 15914
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation
organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of New York, does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint the person or
persons named below its true and Iawful attorney -in -fact, for it and in its name, place and stead to execute in behalf of the said Company, as surety,
f any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof; provided that the liability of the said
Company on any such bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall not exceed the limit stated below.
Name Address Limit of Power
This Power of Attorney revokes all previous powers issued in behalf of the attorneys) -in -fact named above.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed and
attested by its appropriate officers and its corporate seal hereunto affixed this 5t h day of October , 19 95
Attest AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
STATE OF OHIO, COUNTY OF HAMILTON — ss: -
On this 5th day of October, 1995 before me personally appeared GARY T. DUNBAR, to me
known, being duly sworn, deposes and says that he resided in Cincinnati, Ohio, that he is the President of the Bond Division of American National
Fire Insurance Company, the Company described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal; that it was so affixed by
authority of his office under the By -Laws of said Company, and that he signed his name thereto by like authority.
This Power of Attorney is granted by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of American
National Fire Insurance Company by unanimous written consent dated July 27, 1995.
i
i RESOLVED. That the Division President, the several Division Vice Presidents and Assistant Vice Presidents, or anyone of them, be
and hereby is authorized, from time to time, to appoint one or more Attorneys -In -Fact to execute on behalfofthe Company, as surety, any and all
bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof, to prescribe their respective duties and the
respective limits of their authority, and to revoke any such appointment at any time.
RESOLVED FURTHER: That the Company seal and the signature of any of the aforesaid officers and any Secretary or Assistant
Secretary of the Company may be awed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certHicate of either given for the execution of any bond,
undertaking, contract orsuretyship, or other written obligation in the nature thereof, such signature and seal when so used being her ebyedopted by
the Company as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the
same force and effect as though manually axed.
CERTIFICATION
,. I, RONALD C. HAYES, Assistant Secretary of American National Fire Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of
Attorney and the Resolutions of the Board of Directors of July 27, 1995 have not been revoked and are now in full force and effect.
Signed and sealed this 22nd day of August , 19 96
F5 1030M (8/95)
PERFORMANCE BOND
80I4D CHECK /�
BEST RATING f y
LICEN 0 IN EXAS
DATE y_�
PM
k
AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
NEW YORK, NEW YORK
Bond No. 1309230
TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND
(PUBLIC WORK)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that MIKE KLEIN GENERAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
d (hereinafter called the Principal(s)), as Principal(s), and AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY (hereinafter
CITY OF LUBBOCK
called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
j� LUBBOCK, TEXAS
ll (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE—M ILL ION—THREE—HUNDRED—EI GHTY—E I GHT—THOUSAND AND
00/100********************************** Dollars($ *****1,388,000.00******* )
for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors,
successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 22nd
day of . August .19 9§ to
LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATION
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that is the said Principal shall faithfully perform
the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to
remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government
Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same
r' extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal(s) and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
22ndbay of August 19 96. MIKE KLEIN GENERAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
oe
l e K l e i n President (Principal)
COUNTERSIGNED:
By /X �
Resident Agent
(Principal)
(Principal)
AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
By,
Gene Holt Attorney -in -Fact
f�+ S-1114C 02/93)
S
7
I
r
t
M ERICAN NANIONAL FIRE INSURANCE ODNI PANY
New York, New York
Administrative Office: 680 WALNUT STREET • CINCINNATI, OHIO 45202 . 513-369-5000 * FAX 513-723-2740
The number of persons authorized by
this power of attorney is not more than No. U 15914
,
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation
Corganized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of New York, does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint the person or
persons named below its true and lawful attorney -in -fact, for it and in its name, place and stead to execute in behalf of the said Company, as surety,
any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof; provided that the liability of the said
Company on any such bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall not exceed the limit stated below.
Name Address Limit of Power
ras I • v • . ra+�• i r e r�+s
This Power of Attorney revokes all previous powers issued in behalf of the attorncy(s)-in-fact named above.
i IN WITNESS WHEREOF the AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed and
attested by its appropriate officers and its corporate seal hereunto affixed this 5th day of October , l9 95
r Attest AMERICAN NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY
i
g
STATE OF OHIO, COUNTY OF HAMILTON — ss:
On this 5th day of October, 1995 before me personally appeared GARY T. DUNBAR, to me
known, being duly sworn, deposes and says that he resided in Cincinnati, Ohio, that he is the President of the Bond Division of American National
f Fire Insurance Company, the Company described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal; that it was so affixed by
` authority of his office under the By -Laws of said Company, and that he signed his name thereto by like authority.
This Power of Attorney is granted by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of American
National Fire Insurance Company by unanimous written consent dated July 27, 1995.
RESOLVED: That the Division President, the several Division Vice Presidents and Assistant Vick Presidents, or any one of them, be
and hereby is authorized, from time to time, to appoint one ormore Attorneys -In -Fact to execute on behalf of the Company, as surety, any and all
bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof, to prescribe their respective duties and the
respective limits of their authority, and to revoke any such appointment at any time.
RESOLVED FURTHER: That the Company seal and the signature of any of the aforesaid officers and any Secretary or Assistant
Secretary of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certificate of either given for the execution of any bond,
undertaking, contract orsunetyship, orother written obligation in thenatur a thereof, such signature and seal when soused being hereby adopted by
the Company as the original signature ofsuch officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the
7 same force and effect as though manually affixed.
r CERTIFICATION
L I, RONALD C. HAYES, Assistant Secretary of American National Fire Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of
Attorney and the Resolutions of the Board of Directors of July 27, 1995 have not been revoked and are now in full force and effect.
r _
Signed and scaled this 22nd day of August 19 96
r
6 + S 1030M (8/95)
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
AdMbRib-
CATE 001IMM
ftft 1-1 inn
...........
L
PRODUCER
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
Sanford Insurance Agency
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
P.O. Box 64790
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIESBELOW.
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
Lubbock, TX 79464
(806) 792-5564
COMPMY
A SCOTTSDALE INS/ELTON GEORGE
11SURED
MIKE KLEIN GENERAL CONTRACTOR
COWANY
9 GUARANTY NATIL/ELTON GEORGE
my Comp
C TX WC INS FUND
1340 E. 44TH
LUBBOCK TX 79404
COMI'my
D ALBANY INS ./GRZ
THIS IS M CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PEPoOD
INDICATED, NOTATTHSTANDING ANY REOUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT VITTH RESPECT TO WHICH 71-11S
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE SEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
LTR
TM OF l(SURAI4Cff
POLICY Wjbmm
POLICY EFFECTIVE
DATE GAKWM
POLICY EXPIRAIM
DATE (0011MV)
Lam
Cow" LL48M
GEhERAI- AGGFEaATE
82P0j000
A
X commmm& w*nAL Lwam
CLS247971
04/30/96
04/30/97
FRxw= - oownp Am
ji,=,ow
7 CLAM MAN FX OCCUR
PEISOM & AM OU"
stm'ow
EACHH OCCURRENCE
Stm'ow
OWNM & CONTRACTORIS PROT
FFE DAMAGE QWJ am irs)
4SO'No
MM EV V6V am person)
sEXCLUDED
AUTONOBILE LLUIL"
ANY AUTO
CCMBPED SINGLE LIMIT
$
BOOLY *0JRY
ft pe—N
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
BODILY *U"
Per
$
HMED AUTOS
NON4*0NED AUTOS
PFICPERTY DAMAGE
$
GAUGE LIABILITY
AUTO MY - EA ACCIDEIff
8
OTMM THAN AM OWY
ANY AUTO
EACH ACCIDENT
$
AGGREGATE
$
EMESS LLUILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE
82,000.000
B
8 UMBFELLA FORM
UMC1008301
04/30/96
04/30/97
"AGGREGATE
s2,OOOAW
OTHER THAN UlAa9EUA FORM
c
WORKERS COMPENSATION AM
111PLOYERS' LIABILITY
TSF-123717-01
04/30/96
04/30/97
STATUTORY LIMITS
EACH Acama
THE 1`144PRIETOW X aim
PARTN13rMECUTIVE EXCL
OFFICERS AM
DISEASE . POLICY LIMIT
S5001000
CISEASE - BVLOYEE
OTHER
D
BUILDERS
8=173
07/13/96
07/13/97
BFRrICXr 2A00,000
RISK
FRAME 500i000
DESCRIPTION OF OPEUTIONSIMArommmummPEciAL um
RE: LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATIONS
a
..... . ..........
E
SHOULD MY AW TW ABOVE BUCRUM POLICIES BE CANCELLED 018FORE THE
OPIRAMON MATTE lHEREOF 7W ISStWG COMPAKY WILL DIDEAVOR TO KAL
CITY OF LUBBOCK
1-0 DAYS RRM ISOTICZ TO THEC0ffFICA7Z NOLDER KANED TO THE LEFT,
Eff FAILURE TO WWX SUCH 0=2 SHAM 011POW NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
P-O..BOX 2000
LUBBOC4 TX 79457
"m UPON THE COMPANY, US ACOM OR RE 4MMAMVM
A ;AQ Qm
FILE No. 635 06/29 '96 09:40 ID:SANFOPt AGENCY 806 792 9344 PAGE 2
• h ,v lit
R•.lif
Insurancs Agency
p.O• Z 64790
LT�bbo j, T8 79464
(8061 92-5661
�N =UFO ASA "Tr R OF NFORMAMN
ERS 0 RIOHTepa$rora
RI IOAT11 0068 NOT AMEND, NMND OR
RAGS AFFOR010 8Y !I MUC123 SELM
m
COUAANMS AFFOADINa CO RADII
""'� SCOTTSDALIE IV8/ELTON GEORaE
MIKE EIN GENERAL CONTRACTOR
AW
a GUAR"TY NAT' L/ ELTON GEORGE
1340 8". 44TH
4 c�CAMr TZ VC INS FUND
r,
LUBBOOX TY 79404
c a'�"y ALLBANY sirs./axes
1, g
jiiO 0 T0fMMFY THAT THE P=ES OF WOURANM DYED Mow K" BEEN ISSUED TO THE W8UfTEC NAMED ABOM FOR TFfE POLICY PERDO
WDICATED,1NOTYlMWANDIN3 ANY RFMIM ENT, TERM OR CONDMON OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER D=AIINT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH TENS
OERf1fICAiB MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PMAIM. 7H6 MURANCE
AFFORDED BY THE P=E3 DESCRtd M HEFew ® EUBIEOT TO ALL THE �f8,
E%CL4)S AND CONDMOND OFSUCH POLICIES. ULM MOWN UAY HAY! KIN REDUCED by PAIR CLAMS.
j
b Mltpll=
P%xv swan
" YM
DA T OM
Yf»
4
A
Otlwm
apm& LIIHLIY
WOE [XD OCCM
CL82474T1
0 S /3 0 /9 6
04 /3 0 /9 7
aDm AL AOOAFAAT{c
PMooucra; - cowwx r Ado
is ? OO
t
PER MM 1 AM kLMTY
1 =
CACH aaotx>w+Cr
li
/ OONTIIAOia+w rnoT
RCAAO
mm w offw
iEXCLUDED
4
LITMD
GODLY MMYIV 6014PQ
R11MWMRTV
OAIAAISE
I i
t i1.RY
ANY ^-L
NM
1
AM ONLY - FA ACCKe
MR nw+ AUTO Qwvl
EA74 ACCtM f
1
t� �� ��Y �•a �� .:
_
Aoa,enATa
omm Neal"
PACH OCx FMM
iIP,000,1100
8
X FM
UMC1 DDM
0 4 /3 0 /0 6
0 4 /3 0 /'S 7
AQORE4m8
C
OiMNM110M AIW
ITATLTMw Umn
Me?� }�w i' , MMon :
�
C
,"'"'1!Y
� g am
ln"Mm
04/30/96
04/30/97
'aACHAcamw
$SM=
ONSIDE • PCXY LASE
mom
DSEASE - ZAM MfLMEf
d
Organs R>cCt
�.,
D
o7xr+
BUIL ERS
RIBIC r
as2a�7a
07f13/96
07/13/97
6FR,ICM, iaoo,000
FRAME QOooDD
oI= NMI OP T*pv 06ATION1,9ro uwlPw" RSIN
CFAT OFF
RBI LUBBOCK MMMORIAL CIVIC
HOLDER IS NMD
CENTER RENOVATIONS
"DITIONAL INSURED ON aL WITS: A NAIVES OF
BU1R CATION ON THE VC,
j
NOW MY OP TM AIWA DOC IM? iaCLlOtI It C'JICi = IN M Ta
CITY OB LUBDOCS
P • .q . @ 2000
LUABOC TR 70457
l>"AnN CAM TMUF• To MOLfllif CMAM llaL MIArvM ro ML
iO OAYI D'11 MM MO= W M pMMT MATI MUM MAM TO W4 LEM
wT FALLIML TO NAL 8= W= MU" MPM MO CUM710 OR 9"Lr?Y
AMT Km IFOM flat COMP os ae Awat
r fi»r. 7Fi
a n.
r
I I
_,•. ...�[..�., w� .�'".,:.y, Ys ,.„; k. •,_ f °x �'>.'b �°`*'• 3rw.
w....w......ww.ww .
....................................
.v;.}}}:.}}:•r:•:?.;Y:•::::.}}}}}:•}:.:•}:;•:$:;:}:}x•:;•}}::•}}}}:::$$i::$:}}};>w>}:.}..}-•' •:.: '. •:.. .... ... -- ....
} . :; .. .. .... r..... ............... ... ..:,.......... DATE 0
'I@ r:+.::i•}:::$:`:>;:t•S:}S•}'tS$::?•:;}:•::;:$$:�$$$:?1S$:$:S?d$:$$t:•`5:�:S:S:�:S$:: .. �•:.:.
•.5.irtaattvi:a7uxaRaw.GSYrcu4•xa•Y.RG}rYriC�w:}ttR2axk�.`v}-rratSxt•..�. s•.rrnca:.r::br.,:ou-...•,xQ.,.r.....................................................................:::}}::::r::::n:•:.<•:.+.-::::.rJ: }:: r::...,...,,.. r.. r.....
THIS BINDER IS A TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM.
GOUGER PH COMPANY BNDEFI i ti
Seaboard Suretyl37 Paul 6.236.14
Sanford Insurance Agency ESSFE EXPwA
DATE TIME DATE TUE
P.O. Box 64790
0303 Indiana Avenue X AM X 2:01 AM
Lubbock TX 79464 08/23/96 12.01 PM 09/23196 NOON
t•
THIS BINDER tS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE N THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY
CODE: 0001.0353 SUB CODE; PER EXPFUNG POLICY f:
`' GENCY OESCRF'TION OF OPERATIONSNEHICLESIPROPEFRY Pvbdhg Location)
e�' T
,. NOD
City of Lubbock I
c/o Mike Klein General Contret
1340 E 44th Street
Lubbock TX 79404
3r. : �. v...i••.:..: x•. .: ....:r............:.......,•:::�•r}::::w:::r.v...... ...... .......Y.:... f,..v •. n.:.•Y.a.:..n...v. .... .... .:
.,.....,,.....:..r..,,..r.} . ................. .............r....r........: .... Y•-.:•.. .....t....t•:::.�::.::::.:•::::•:::::::::::::r.••:::::.�::::::::::::}.�:::.,•r:::•r:$::.:•::-::r . :5,:::�:>:.:: ,:F•r
....v.....................}..........n.... • , • r............ n........ ........:.{:....{ ......................v •: •r:.v:: t:vv:.•v.:v::::: ••.• :v :..:w
:::rv:::rr::::::::..::.:,:.a;}.,•:r,•::::?•:::r.,,ta.,•.c.rrt.:...r.:::..,•...,:.S.Y..r.....,:.:..r.....r.....tr......:•..........a>::.as.:..,.t.,r.r.::: r:::::: •r::::fi:•:: r.... ..... ,S:�:S�$:S:}•r: r}•.:•:o-.;•: :;.r,•••.....� :..:..:..::� .., .::.a. •• .: ..S.rc: '
c. TYPE OF INSURANCE COVERAOE/FORMS AMOUNT OEDUCTIBLE CONS %
PROPERTY CAUSES OF LOSS �
BASIC 7 BROAD 7SPEC i
GENE LIABILITY Lubbock Memorial Civic Center GENERAL AGGREGATE s 1,500,000
COMMERCIAL GENERAL uABIL" Renovations .... Contract of PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG s '
CLAIMS 7 OCCUR $1,388,000 OCP coverages & ADV WJRYs
X OWNER'S s CONTRACTORS PROT EACH OCCURRENCE s 1,500,000
FATE DAMAGE (Any one We) s
RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: LIED EXP (Any one non) s
:ALITddOBILE LYIBILTY COMBNED SINGLE LIMIT s
ANY AUfO BODILY INJURY (Per ram) s _
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per aceide" $ .^
' SCHEDULED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE s
HIRED AUTOS MEDICAL PAYMENTS s
NON -OWNED AUTOS PERSONAL WJJRY PROT s i
UNINSURED MOTORIST s
s
AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLES ACTUAL CASH VALUE
I
COLLISION: STATED AMOUNT s
OTHER THAN COL: OTHER
GARAGE LIABLITY AUTO CNLY - EA ACCIDENT s
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:
s
f
C EXCESS LIABILRY
EACH OCCURRENCE
UMBRELLA FCIRM AGGREGATE t
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: SELF -INSURED RETENTION I<
[STATUTORY LIMITS
WOPdGM COMPENSATION EACH ACCIDENTAND
i
EMPLOYERS ILIABLTTY DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT Ls ?
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE SOAOIM
i
FE
OTHER
COVERAGES
•}}•;.:........ CJ
::: r...::r::.:•..:.....:...:::::: r{:::•....r..... :::J•r•�r:, •rr.•:....:......F....•:.::r•}r•:.•:t.r:<t}:$:•;t.y::}:::}}r:;y}}:Y•:}:�}:::}}}:::::�}:::}••}>:.}•:
........... r............., r:.. r. r.:.. .:,...:....:.... •r r........ r........... r. r........... r..............,.............,, ..,. . ...}'r. ...{r....... v; }:::::.i ::v: vv •.., :••kw:.rv.vr r; }:�v}:::}.:v.}v;::•::?::;: w.{:$}:;y"^' }v;:: :a}:t?•v.•:
r:: r. •x;:: nv. •r..rr•...Jv. $r :.:. Jr.•r...r.v.:}::•:..}v:x.•Y.•::::::?:t::v:x::::::::.::n.. .......J.v w: v.v:.w::::: ita... .... .. ....:.r:Yv:;. ... .. ..r
.; :? ::� :::: r.?•}}?n}::•Wf.:•}.+............. $.... r....r ...... .... v .... ..:. .. {........vt... ...�....:nw:. .. .. ........... r ........ ........ .r. J.. :• •:: •.v • : •:: ra:•: t: v ::::: ..:: .: ........r; .:..r . v: .a. v.{.. . •Y.•tv: r•• +iklViiff.,3li•r.JlilE?.i3�S „tac.,4:,�r,}:r?•:$J •' .r:-rr...,..; ... .:
i,•..,•rr.:,:.:•ray.Lran+}two-}x•}::�,,,•.au. r:..rr::}ru.....,::.}r: r:A}}»}:..y;,•,:.;;.}.£•:, r •.,• .-•R"'??::•'t:"'•:,:w.; .:.:... .. ....r.......:....:....�•r.....k.......,...,:r.r....kr... .,...:•:.. n•:.•..:•::.:..rfttrJ:G:}•}:}t;....:::.....a::}: :.:}}} .:::::r.}::•. .........} ::•xta:•r s
MORTGAGEE ADDMONAL RLSURED
LOSS PAYEE
LOAN i
s
AUTHOR REPRESENTATIVE
S ce age y is
..:•}:.,Y....x......:.;o-x{x{a}..•f.:Mx.}•r,;{•??:Jrr:-}:•:t•}:t•.:rarx>n:�: .....•Yr.};.x{.r.•:;.}.axt..........ax•:.}xxtuar};{;r...}::.:.;•.}:tu::.:?, :.:.x;•�:•:,Y.t•}r}:•r:r -}. w..,•,:•r. ..t.. utt?..:r.:•.x.r :...,xxr :a::,;., •a:.:.::. •.ti{;,::::Y. •.
............J...,, ..........'f .........• ..............................,..............................................::.....:.:......:....:::.... ..........k ..:..,:::...:::: ..:`42 :::-.: r:$:$$':: *.,• •......... rr...,....:?:v-::: s::x;.: w•...,r,..,...:ti.... :x:...r .}
�:.;:•r}}#:•}:.<::.}:{:.}•:t.$:.}; i�3' : 'f3.1 . :3iiF.. E�' Dg>: "`.}}:;.}:.:;.: •}:.:�'•.<' � is ..:s}.
RJS
.. - �.. - -
CONDITIONS
This Company binds the kind(s) of Insurance stipulated on the reverse side. The Insurance is subject to the
terms, conditions and limitations of the policy(ies) in current use by the Company.
This binder may be cancelled by the Insured by surrender of this binder or by written notice to the Company
stating when cancellation will be effective. This binder may be cancelled by the Company by notice to the
Insured in accordance with the policy conditions. This binder is cancelled when replaced by a policy. If this
binder is not replaced by a policy, the Company is entitled to charge a premium for the binder according to the
Rules and Rates in use by the Company.
Applicable in California
When this form is used to provide insurance in the amount of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more, the title
of the form is changed from "Insurance Binder' to `Cover Note".
Applicable in Delaware
The mortgagee or Obligee of any mortgage or other instrument given for the purpose of creating a lien on real
property shall accept as evidence of insurance a written binder issued by an authorized insurer or its agent if
the binder includes or is accompanied by: the name and address of the borrower; the name and address of the
lender as loss payee; a description of the Insured real property; a provision that the binder may not be canceled
within the term of the binder unless the lender and the insured borrower receive written notice of the cancel-
lation at least ten (10) days prior to the cancellation: except in the case of a renewal of a policy subsequent to
the closing of the loan, a paid receipt of the full amount of the applicable premium, and the amount of
Insurance coverage.
Chapter 21 Title 25 Paragraph 2119
Applicable in Nevada
Any person who refuses to accept a binder which provides coverage of less than $1,0D0,000.00 when proof is
required: (A) Shall be fined not more than $500.00, and (B) is liable to the party presenting the binder as proof
of insurance for actual damages sustained therefrom.
RJS
AlG-26-19% 13126 BOLEY FEATFERSTON INS.
Ail 3,)a 9__CI P ml JCif
F
I
L
F
H Le Uri &%` v 5:1:: u yce + "„ ^i in: .flx.
• w ww aer..Mn+w.�.'::.:v- [. ki Uf'kn-0 t 1r• �i .:RM
FNDUCIR ..
i7 %o �i .' `. .�r8 �'li..;r. a.~ 08/26p95
_ v..v . 4..... Y t
THIS 'RTFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
8oley Ireatberston Insurance
P. O. Drawer 10
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE APPORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
Wichita Falls TX 76307
CCMPAm
A TRINITY MTXVIMSAL OF XANMS S
BOLRY YEATHERST= INSURANCE
INSURED
COMPANY
B
COMPANY
C
:UKR yzz=u +
HIES naffi INDIVID4JIL
COMPANY
p
1340 S 44TA 8TWMT
LUBBOCK TIC 79404
� ��Yn�+. }.a wrap.. �.�.. ..µY�Y.tiwi rw.......... �µ:KKµ.:.C�.....�:}?AvT4�.u�>.q%i�WYiv...v ...�x~~'•H'TA»��..�.k..4»Jn y+.%oSw
����{ hi.[ Kiv hw.'tl ."IXv:.:.r• N WHw` � � � Mf }4K �� µ%. .e'.•.�^.` ^OVF 4:'n.: ;>;'l;r . . R.%M Y...> w».xx �+4MP%JW%yvwp�
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED, ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
DMICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMINT, TRIM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTNFR DOCULUNT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY SE ISSUED OR MAY IfRTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY rR i POLICIES DESCRIBED MEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TT:RM3,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDMONS OF SUCH POLICES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAV6 BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS,
LTX TYPE OF AIGUWWI� PDLtGY NUNIaBt
POLICY EPm"NC POLICY EXNN1TION UMRS
OATS (MU M11MY) DATE IMMMOfM
gE
9kaWILIllTv
GENERALAOOREGAT[
PISOCKICTS • COMI'mr AOO
•
COMMERCIAL ODIEMIL NAIILLII/
CLAIMS MADE FI OGCUR
PERSONAL i ACV EJJLIRY
1
I EACL) OCCURA 4fi
1
OWNER'S Ik CONTRACTOR'S PROT
PW DAMAGE IAry am f W)
•
ILEO E)IP pm an aaW)
a
IL
AUTOAMOOILGUABU
7C
Y
AHYAUTD
TCA3457161
03/17/95
03/17/97
CO]AIIBINmSING[tUMIT
41,000,000
5WILY tWLIAY
MPv P/IWn)
I 1
ALL OYINIM AUTOS
CCHWJ60 AUr08
X
X
I HIRED AUTOS
NON-0WNCP AUTOS
I
aOCLLY EiJLLRY
Chr OW&VO
1
►n:MTY DASMACE
{
�—
GAIU►GZ LWOUTY
ALfIV ONLY • EA ACCIDMT
j {
ANY AVTO
I
OTHERTHAN AUTO ONLV,
EACH ACCIDENT
1
_
A¢LfAEGATE
� 1
•
RI(CESS UAOIUTV
I
rACH OCCVRRINCE
/
AGGREGATE
I 1
UMBRELLA POFDA
(
1
MIR THAN UMVfXUA POW
1NORCOIS f.06MrlfLSATION AND
EIMPI.OYIS", LInuff
.9.iJJ
..' "'•` • ;'„'
C. EACH ACCICENT
•
THE PROMIMM INCL
PARTNtdMAUSCUTIVE
i
EL mccAn • POLICY LIMIT {
EL OIMAU . EA LWWYEE 1
OFPVCERS ARC IXC)
OTHER
UCAIPT10f1 Or QrRWTtONWI.CCATIONSIVEHMMISPEMU "W&
PROJECTS LUBBOCK CIVIC CENTER XNTSRIOR
R2WM-hTIOBi
/�/y}}�.� �%�{ } �`� Avwy. %r MM SM Ihr�•X .. Mom,
_ ..��� ,. -0i 9., wnv� `7�[.}6i.A v....rw wb \%�. U+A ,r
.....-4wJ'4",'�r �...... . M ,.. L...... ., wnk � ........ xk a
'%K•a'�.yyi'FNtY� ^YimN�.: iWM%O�tiY•�1..iK <"�� ,�^�
a�Viiis�a >•W. �a y.Y�.+w..t.M »Ax wnn'�wtM.4p. qr:
.:&....... ... wigs' �;.,.....,..�....... ..kww'x� .. .. .. .T•a w
CIrVO37
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRf M POLICM 61 CANCG I LSE Tiff
VUNRATION VATS THUMOl', THE IBSUCMC COMPANY VAL EFDEAVOR TO (RAIL
20 OAYi WAITTEN NOTICE TO T11E CERTIFlCATC HOLDER BAUED TU THE LWF.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
GUT FAILURE TO VIAL IUCH NDTCE SHALL YIPOSE RO OELIGATEN OR UAQRCY
Of ANY EtNO UPCN THE CCMPANIY, I'M AtM0M OR PMREM3IT^j7Vt6.
RUM NEIPMEN TA r
S MY 3
. . ...%.. ,...rnw•v....ryq»N..v.yiu• ;•.vw /?]yM M1 :4� �rfONwv xJ'
..y},h:h.N.xaGWM:aSs..�A.w.vnt..v }£.•:t IX `}.k a.f.K4M1eww`:°...'.•.,e.:M"'"w'''«.?:Xh}3't�.
..r Y
•.1��+ K
"'"`..:?,^. ,-k :...E'?....
TOTAL P.01
i
Office of
City of Lubbock Purchasing
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
806-767-2167
MAILED TO VENDOR: July 31,1996
CLOSE DATE: August 6, 1996 a@ 2:00 P.M.
ITB #13641 - LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATIONS
ADDENDUM #1
The following Items take precedence over specifications for the above named ITB. Where any Item
called for In the ITB documents Is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed a copy of the revised specifications, pages 1 through 6, along with
the additional plans and table of contents.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to : (806)767-2164
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID.
RS/ca
Enclosure
r
ADDENDUM NO. 1 DATE: 7/31 /96
PROJECT TITLE: LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER
INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
P"
This Addendum is issued in connection with the revisions of plans and specifications which have been
previously issued as an INVITATION TO BID entitled Project No. ITB #13641 / LMCC Interior
Renovations, Lubbock, Texas.
r
f
Addenda are issued prior to execution of the Contract.
WHEN CONSTRUCTION IS NOT UNDER CONTRACT, all instructions contained herein shall be reflected
in the Contract Sum and this Addendum will be made a part of the Contract Documents, if, as, and
when a Construction Contract is awarded.
This Addendum consists of six (6) pages.
PERTAINING TO THE PROJECT MANUAL
1
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION
1. Section 00 003 TABLE OF CONTENTS: Delete the existing Table of Contents, in its entirety;
Add new Section 00 003, Table of Contents, inclusive, attached herewith.
2. Section 01999, LIST OF DRAWINGS: Delete the existing List of Drawings, page 01 999-1 in
its entirety; Add new Section 01 999, List of Drawings, attached herewith.
3. Section 01 010, SUMMARY OF WORK, Page 01 010-2, Article 1.5, Paragraph A: Add sub-
paragraphs 8 and 9 as follows:
8. Contractor shall determine final materials quantities required for the project and as
agreed upon by the Owner Irefer to Schedule in the Special Conditions).
9. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling the carpet materials "waste" during the
installation. All carpet installations which are not in compliance with the contract
documents shall be corrected at the Contractors expense, including carpet material
replacement costs.
4. Section 08 710 DOOR HARDWARE, Page 08 710-3 Article 2.1, Paragraph B, Subparagraph 2:
Delete subparagraph 2 in its entirety; Add the following:
2. Cylinders and Locks: Match existing key system
a. Sargent Manufacturing Company
5. Section 09 921, MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS
r" A. Page 09 921-2, Article 1.7, Paragraph A, Subparagraph 1: Delete subparagraph 1 in its
entirety; Add the following:
1. Multi -Colored Interior Coating: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of amount applied
packaged in single gallon containers.
{
ADDENDUM NO.
PROJECT TITLE:
1
LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER
INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
2
DATE: 7/31 /96
B. Page 09 921-2, Article 2.1, Paragraphs A and B: Delete paragraphs A and B in their
entirety; Add the following:
A. Manufacturer: Zolatone Process, Inc. (Zolatone)
C. Page 09 921-3, Article 2.2, Paragraph B: Delete paragraph B in its entirety.
D. Page 09 921-3, Article 2.4, Paragraph B: Delete paragraph B in its entirety; Add the
following:
B. Product: Zolatone System 43
6. Section 12 541, DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS:
A. Page 12 541-3, Article 2.1, Paragraphs C, D and E: Delete paragraphs C, D and E in their
entirety; Add the following:
C. Drapery Fabric (TYPE C, D, F, G, H, I, J, K & L)
D. Acceptable Drapery Manufacturer and Product:
1. Manufacturer:
KNOLL
TEXTILES
a.
Product Name:
Transition - W816 / 1 (vertical application)
b.
Content:
100% Polyester
c.
Color:
Oyster
d.
Width:
54 inches
e.
Finish:
Flame Retardant / Stain Repellent
f.
Flame Retardant
Rating:
ASTM E-84, Class A flame spread rating, UBC 4202.A
(delamination test), California Bulletin # 117, NFPA 701
small scale.
g.
Light Fastness:
Meets 40 hour requirement. AATCC-16A test method.
h.
Durability:
Exceeds 48,000 double rubs. NAFM requirement 15,000
double rubs, Wyzenbeck Test Method.
i.
Product Data
Publication:
Manufacturer's Brochure on file with the Architect.
2. (Sheer Draperies for
Terrace Suite) Manufacturer: MAHARAM
a.
Product Name:
Sheers, Aureole #165709
b.
Content:
100% Polyester, Permanently FR
c.
Color:
# 03 White
d.
Width:
48 inches
e.
Flame Retardant
Rating:
ASTM E-84, Class A flame spread rating, NFPA 701 small -
large scale.
B. Page 12 541-4, Article 2.4 Window Drapery and Curtain Assembly Schedule: Delete type
E Reception.
7. SPECIAL CONDITIONS, Bidder's Review of the Job Premises: Correction on telephone number
for Freddie Chavez: 806-767-2267.
r
t.
I
f ADDENDUM NO.
PROJECT TITLE:
1
LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER
INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
3
DATE: 7/31 /96
i 8. Section 16 500, LIGHTING: Delete paragraph 2.10, Emergency Battery Packs, and add the
following: "Contractor shall connect one soffit light at each end of each bay to the emergency
battery pack system. (Total of 6). Fixtures on the north side shall be connected to battery
pack "BA" and fixtures on the south shall be connected to "BB".
9. Section 10 651 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITION REFURBISHMENT, Page 10 651-1, Article 1.2,
rr Paragraph A: Add subparagraph 4. as follows:
4. Contractor shall adjust panels and trim sweep seals as required to compensate for
additional thickness at floor resulting from carpet installation. Contractor shall conduct
his work in a manner to insure that any warranties and guarantees currently existing for
the operable panel partition are maintained. Owner will furnish manufacturers name and
original installer upon request.
10. Section 09 680 CARPET: Page 09 680-1, Article 1.2, Paragraph B: Add subparagraph 7. as
follows:
7. Contractor shall provide any required "undercutting" of wood doors as required to clear
new carpet installed. Contractor shall refinish to match any portions of door finish
damaged by undercutting process. Metal doors shall also be trimmed or adjusted as
r" required for clearance at new carpet areas.
fi
11. SPECIAL CONDITIONS, Paragraph entitled "Movement of Furnitpre. Furnishings and
Eauinment Add the following: The Contractor shall be responsible for moving and returning
of large planters in the Pedestrian Mall as required to facilitate installation of carpet and
completion of other construction activities.
12. Section 11 132 PROJECTION SCREENS: Page 11 132-3. Article 2.2, Paragraph D,
Subparagraphs 2, 3 and 4: Delete subparagraphs 2, 3 and 4 in their entirety.
13. Section 10 265 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS: Page 10 265-3. Article 2.2,
Paragraph C: Delete paragraph C in its entirety.
14. Section 09 921 MULTI -COLOR INTERIOR COATINGS:
A. Page 09 921-1. Article 1.3, Paragraph C: Delete paragraph C in its entirety; Add the
following:
C. Submit samples of pre -selected color for verification by the Architect.
B. Page 09 921-3. Article 2.2, Paragraph C: Delete paragraph C in its entirety; Add the
following:
C. Color: Color shall be Classics number 4326890.
i
ADDENDUM NO. 1
PROJECT TITLE: LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER
INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
PERTAINING TO THE DRAWINGS
4
DATE: 7/31 /96
15. SHEET AO-1.1 TITLES, LEGENDS, INDEX & NOTES: INTERIOR RENOVATION KEY NOTE
SCHEDULE:
A. Delete note C8 in its entirety; Add the following:
C8 Install new translucent acrylic diffuser panels (Pattern 19, Prismatique Acrylic,
.156 inches thick) sized to match existing modules. Mechanically attach to top
side of metal grid system. Install new suspended light fixtures to a height of
12 inches above top face of diffuser panels.
B. Delete note W40 in its entirety; Add the following:
W40 (ALTERNATE NO. 4): Remove existing paper towel/waste receptacle and
replace with new: American Specialties Inc. #04692 Roll Paper Towel
Dispenser and Disposal. Recessed installation ; verify existing wall condition
and rough opening required for each location. Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel.
Remove existing soap dispensers and replace with new: American Specialties
Inc. #5002 Disposa-Valve "Soap Gun"; Cut opening in existing vanity counter
backsplash for recessed installation (location centered between sinks, typical);
rough opening: 5-3/4" x 13-1 /2" x 4-1/4". Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel.
16. SHEET A4-2.2 PEDESTRIAN MALL ELEVATIONS, West Elevation C: Delete Signage for BOX
OFFICE at south end "G5%
17. SHEET A4-4.1 EXHIBIT HALL MAIN LEVEL & UPPER LEVEL PLANS, Interior Signage Details B:
Delete Signage type "G5".
18. New Drawings: Add the following new drawings, attached herewith:
SI-01 PUBLIC RESTROOMS NEW SOFFIT DETAILS
SI-02 BANQUET HALL WALL SCONCE DETAILS
19. SHEET E1-1.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE: Add the following:
Fixture Manufacturer
TYPE 'D' Baldinger The Richard Meir Collection, MAX WALL, RM-27977-CMF-
Bronze-MOD 36" OH, White Faux Alabaster on Glass/Brushed
Bronze, 11 1/2"W x 36"H x 4"D. Lamps: 4-13PL
TYPE 'E' Visa Lighting COLONNADE, CB3400-BZ-TL, Translucent acrylic diffuser with
fabricated solid bar stock, 7 1 /4"W x 20"H x 5 1 /8"D, Brushed
Solid Bronze/Top Lens. Lamps: 2-13PL
TYPE 'F' Baldinger The Richard Meir Collection, JOSEPH DOUBLE PENDANT, RM-
27855/D, White Faux Alabaster on Glass/Satin Brass, 21" x
48", Drop 36" with recess canopy. Lamps: 6-39BX with
dimming ballast.
r
5
ADDENDUM NO. 1 DATE: 7/31 /96
PROJECT TITLE: LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER
INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
TYPE 'K' Zumtobel OPTOS, Saturn, 8" aperture, SAT-L, Lamps: 1-150 PAR 38.
Install light fixture centered over sink in new drywall soffit, (1)
fixture per sink in all Public Restrooms indicated as part of
!' Alternate No. 4.
Note: Type G and K are identical; change Type 'G' from 6" to 8".
TYPE 'L' Baldinger The Richard Meir Collection, MAX WALL, RM-27977, White
Faux Alabaster on Glass/Satin Brass, 11 1 /2"W x 12 3/4"H x
4"D. Lamps: 2-13PL
Note: All lighting fixtures to be supplied as specified. No substitutions.
List of Manufacturers:
BALDINGER ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING, INC., 19-02 Steinway Street, Astoria, NY 11105;
TEL: (718) 204-5700, FAX: (718) 721-4986
VISA LIGHTING, 8600 West Bradley Road, Milwaukee, WI 53224, TEL: (800) 788-8472,
(414) 354-6600, FAX: (414) 354-7436
20. SHEET ME7-2.1, CORRIDOR E161 and E162: In Corridors E161 and E162, add (7) Type 'C'
lighting fixtures to be installed between existing fixtures and connect as required to existing
circuit.
21. SHEET E7-1.1, BANQUET HALL: Verify hang points of track lighting for stage on site. Provide
electronic chain motor (inverted) running from top downward. Use 6" round trim flange at
opening where chain drops through ceiling panel.
22. SHEET E1-1.2, ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM: Change designation of 120/208V panel from
'DP' to 'DB'.
23. SHEET E1-1.1, BANQUET HALL ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN:
A. ADD 1 - 4-gang box @ 16" A.F.F. in stage area, with 4 - 3/4" conduits from the box to the
sound booth. Verify exact location with the Sound Contractor.
B. ADD 2 - 2-gang boxes @ 48" A.F.F. in storage room east of stage with 1 - 3/4" conduit
from each box to the sound booth. Verify exact location with the Sound Contractor on site.
C. ADD 1 - 2-gang J-box and 1 - duplex receptacle @ 12,-0" A.F.F. in the N.E. corner of the
Banquet Hall for closed circuit T.V. Install 2 - 1" conduits from the J-box to the sound
booth.
D. ADD General Note 2 to read: The Contractor shall be extremely careful not to damage
existing speakers during demolition as they will be re -installed in new ceiling.
E. INSTALL 1 - 20 pole 3 phase 4 wire 100 amp breaker panel in sound booth for power to
new sound rack. Provide 20 - 20 amp 1 phase circuit breakers in panel and feed from
transformer 'BTB' in mechanical room east of sound booth with 4 #2 and 1 #8 gnd. in 1-
1 /2"C. Fuse new disconnect @ transformer @ 100 amps.
rl.
i
6
f ADDENDUM NO. 1 DATE: 7/31 /96
PROJECT TITLE: LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER
r" INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
F. ADD to keyed Note #2: Clean and paint all relocated speaker grilles to match color of
ceiling panels as approved by Architect. Clean and paint all existing speaker grilles (to
remain) to match ceiling color in which they occur.
24. SHEET A4-4.1, EXHIBIT HALL MAIN LEVEL:
A. INSTALL 2 - 2-gang surface mounted boxes in storage E135, Storage #106, and just north
of Door E37. Mount @ 16" A.F.F.
B. INSTALL 1 - 2-gang surface box in Exhibit Hall just north of Entry E143 and just south of
Entry Ell 65. Mount @ 16" A.F.F.
i C. INSTALL non-metallic surface boxes (Wiremold 5407 or equal) as described in "a" and "b"
above. Install 2-channel non-metallic raceway. (Wiremold 5400 (white) or equal) from
boxes to ceiling below balcony. Raceway shall tee @ Door E37 and turn into Hall E151 at
the ceiling. Turn up with 2 - 1-1/2" conduits through ceiling into Control Booth E202
above.
D. INSTALL 1 - 2-gang surface box in exhibit hall just south of Door E70 (Wiremold 5407 or
equal). Install surface raceway (2 channel - Wiremold 5406) from box to structure above
and continue with 1" conduit to Control Booth E202.
25. SHEET A4-4.1, EXHIBIT HALL UPPER LEVEL:
A. INSTALL 4 - duplex outlets in millwork at Control Booth E202 and connect to 1 - dedicated
120V 20 amp circuit.
B. INSTALL 2 - 20 amp 2-pole circuits in existing sound rack in Control Booth E202.
C. INSTALL 10 - 20 amp 120V circuits at amp racks on catwalk above stage. Verify exact
requirements with Sound Contractor.
26. GENERAL: The Electrical Contractor shall visit site prior to bidding and verify availability and
location of power sources for service to new outlets as described above. This Contractor shall
I also coordinate closely with the Sound Contractor and the Owner for exact locations of boxes,
raceways, etc. to be used with sound system devices.
poll
1
i
END OF ADDENDUM
7
EXISTING
NEW RECESSED DOWNLIGHT
I/2' GYPSUM BOARD OVER
3 5/8' METAL STUDS 24' O.C.
CENTER LIGHT FIXTURE
IN SOFFIT AND OVER SINK
(1) LIGHT FIXTURE PER SINK
SECURE I/2' GYPSUM BOARD
TO FURRING CHANNELS
EXISTING MIRROR
I IL- I/" L. 61-1 Il/LV
A SECTION OF SOFFIT / PUBLIC RESTROOMS
SCALE NO SCALE
NOTE:
ALL PUBLIC RESTROOMS AS PART OF
ALTERNATE NO.4.
REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES,
INSTALL NEW SOFFIT AND LIGHT
FIXTURES PER DETAILS A d B.
OF SOFFIT (TTP.) ` FRONT FACE OF SOFFIT
ELEVATION SOFFIT DETAIL / PUBLIC RESTROOMS
SCALE NO SCALE
� N
L
L.LaQ
V� o
O r
r
jLJLj
V DC
h Q
CCo
L
�C
V
i
bddQQ�
aq
t
� >pWNALK�.,c 14AKMrwr
SKETTRU
j FLIKIC
RESTROOMS
NEW 5OFFIT
DETAILS
loo
;fm7f 51-01
1'=4'
0
I
I
I
I
I
----
I
A FRONT VIEW OF WALL SCONCE
SCALE NO SCALE
NOTE:
INSTALL NEW WOOD VENEERED
PANEL5 WITH CONCEALED
FA5TENER5 AT ALL LOCATION5
IN THE BANQUET HALL WHERE NEW
WALL 5CONCE5 ARE INDICATED
1' REVEAL
CENTERED
ON PANEL
15'-0' AEE.
1112' THICK
WOOD VENT
PANEL MOL
TO EX15TINi
WOOD PAN
NEW WALL
5CONCE
MOUNTED
ON PANEL
I' REVEAL
a SIDE VIEW
SCALE NO SCALE
C,
TOP VIEW
SCALE NO SCALE
�z
• .o W
Li- i d
0
V oC
Ic
CCo
CC
C
I 'C
V
�m
�ddQQ�
A NpgIQ�mYYJln
ipN�Ym MCM�M1lC
Sao a
i�wnuc rn.w�-Ty m.nc
I��wur•n••R�+�w��c
�R
BANQUET
HALL WALL
SCONCE
DETAILS
nu ro. sHciT No.
51-02
� 01/Ib/96
r-�
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION
LUBBOCK, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 003-2
ion Number and T'rtl
09 255 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 680 Carpet
09 920 Interior Painting
09 921 Multi -Color Interior Coatings
09 960 Fabric Wallcovering
09 985 Fabric -Wrapped Panels
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 265 Wall Surface Protection Systems
10 425 Signs
10 651 Operable Panel Partition Refurbishment
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 132 Projection Screens
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 520 Motorized Shades
12 541 Draperies and Curtains
DIVISION
15 - MECHANICAL
15 010
General
15 020
Testing
r,
15 250
Insulation
C
15 400
Plumbing
15 500
Automatic Fire Protection Systems
15 840
15 870
Ductwork
Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers
DIVISION
16 - ELECTRICAL
r
16 010
General Electrical Provisions
16110
Raceways
16120
Conductors
r-
16 130
Boxes and Fittings
16134
Panelboards
16 140
Wiring Devices
16 170
Switches and Fuses
16 450
Grounding
16 460
Dry -Type Transformers
16 500
Lighting
Last Page
09 255-8
09 511-5
09 680-8
09 920-10
09 921-4
09 960-6
09 985-4
10 265-4
10 425-4
10 651-3
Released for
Latest
Construction
Revision
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
07/31/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
07/31/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
11 132-3 06/26/96
12 520-3 06/26/96
12 541-5 06/26/96
15 010-5
15 020-2
15 250-1
15 400-2
15 500-3
15 840-5
15 870-2
16 010-5
16 110-4
16 120-2
16 130-3
16 134-2
16 140-2
16 170-2
16 450-3
16 460-2
16 500-3
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
06/26/96
07/31/96
07/31/96
07/31/96
07/31/96
07/31/96
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION
LUBBOCK, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 003-1
Released for
Latest
r"
I
Section Number
and Title
Last Page
Construction
Revision
INTRODUCTORY
PAGES
00 001
Title Page
00 001-1
07/31 /96
00 003
Table of Contents
00 003-2
06/26/96
07/31 /96
r.
CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT
t
General Conditions of the Construction Contract
Provided by City of Lubbock
r
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION
1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 010
Summary of Work
01 010-2
06/26/96
07/31 /96
01 027
Applications For Payment
01 027-3
06/26/96
01030
Alternates
01 030-2
06/26/96
r
01 035
Modification Procedures
01 035-2
06/26/96
l
01 045
Cutting and Patching
01 045-3
06/26/96
01300
Submittals
01300-5
06/26/96
01 400
Quality Control
01 400-3
06/26/96
7
01 500
Construction Facilities &
Temporary Controls
01 500-4
06/26/96
01 541
Protection of Installed Work
01 541-1
06/26/96
01 600
Materials and Equipment
01 600-3
06/26/96
7
01 631
Substitutions
01 631-2
06/26/96
01 700
Contract Closeout
01 700-3
06/26/96
01 999
List of Drawings
01 999-2
06/26/96
07/31 /96
DIVISION
2 - SITE WORK
02 071
Selective Demolition For Interiors
02 071-5
06/26/96
!�
DIVISION
3 - CONCRETE
Not Used
rift
DIVISION
4 - MASONRY
Not Used
DIVISION
5 - METALS
Not Used
DIVISION
6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
06 402
Interior Architectural Woodwork
06 402-7
06/26/96
r
DIVISION
7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Not Used
DIVISION
8 - DOORS & WINDOWS
08 110
08 710
Steel Doors and Frames
Door Hardware
08 110-5
08 710-6
06/26/96
06/26/96
07/31 /96
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION
LUBBOCK, TEXAS LIST OF DRAWINGS
01 999-1
Date
Latest
Sheet No.
Sheet Title
Issued
Revision
ARCHITECTURAL
AO-1.1
TITLE, LEGEND, INDEX & NOTES
06/26/96
07/31/96
A2-1.1
LOWER LEVEL, MAIN LEVEL & UPPER
LEVEL REFERENCE PLANS
06/26/96
A4-1.1
BANQUET HALL ENLARGED PLAN &
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
06/26196
A4-1.2
BANQUET HALL PLAN, REFLECTED
CEILING PLAN & ELEVATIONS
06/26/96
A4-1.3
DETAILS
06/26/96
A4-2.1
PEDESTRIAN MALL LOWER LEVEL, MAIN
LEVEL & UPPER LEVEL PLANS
06/26/96
A4-2.2
PEDESTRIAN MALL ELEVATIONS
06/26/96
07/31/96
A4-2.3
DETAILS
06/26/96
A4-3.1
MEETING ROOM PLANS, ELEVATIONS &
DETAILS
06/26/96
A4-4.1
EXHIBIT HALL MAIN LEVEL & UPPER
LEVEL PLANS
06/26/96
07/31/96
A4-4.2
EXHIBIT HALL ELEVATIONS
06/26/96
A4-5.1
THEATER PLAN & ELEVATIONS
06/26/96
A5-1.1
CARPET PLAN
06/26/96
SI-01
PUBLIC RESTROOMS NEW SOFFIT
DETAILS
07/31/96
SI-02
BANQUET HALL SCONCE DETAILS
07/31/96
ELECTRICALIMECHANICAL
ME1-1.1
BANQUET HALL MECHANICAL &
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN
06/26/96
M1-1.1.1
BANQUET HALL MECHANICAL FLOOR
PLAN
06/26/96
E1-1.1
BANQUET HALL ELECTRICAL FLOOR
PLAN
06/26/96
07/31/96
E1-1.2
BANQUET HALL ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES
& DETAILS
06/26/96
07/31/96
ME1-2.1
PEDESTRIAN MALL MECHANICAL &
ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN
06/26/96
07/31/96
E1-2.1
EXHIBIT HALL ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN
07/31/96
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS
FFROM : MIKE KLEIN GBH CONTRACTORS PHONE NO. : 806 7479869
Aug. 22 19% 10:02;M P10
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Appropriate insurance Agent/Broker
Prior to Award of Contract
1, the undersigned Agent/Broker, certify that the insurance requirements contained In this bid document have
been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this
r contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within tan (10) days after being notified of such award by
contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meetingAW the requirements
i for the General Liability, Worker's Compensation Umbrella, and OCP(copies
Bill Grisham
Agent (Signature) Agent (Print)
Name ofAgentlBroker. Sanford Insurance Agency _
c. Address of AAgent/BrokerP 0 Box 67490 _
City/State/Zp: Lubbock, TX 79454
Agent/BrokerTelephone Number. ( 806 ) 792-5564
,Date: 8-23-96
CONTRACTOR'S NAME: Mike Klein General Contractor, Inc. _
(Print or Type )
r CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: 1340 E 44th St _
. Lubbock, TX 79404
NOTE TO AGEWISROKER _
if this time requirement Is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposa.I and award the
contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please
contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)767-2165.
C810 #13641 - LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATIONS
7
attach(
F
0
F
F
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based
on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage; to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after
the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to
provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
7
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the
legal requiremen for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or
to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and
filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for
the duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of
this rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor.
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services. 0
I-
U
F-
Z
O
U
r
CONTRACT
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
t
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 22nd day of August, 1996, by and between the City of
j" Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to
do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, acid MIKE KLEIN GENERAL CONTRACTORS, INC. of the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, and the State of Texas, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
l WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
l[ described as follows:
BID # 13641 - LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER RENOVATIONS - $1,388,000.00
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor,
`.. insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the
r contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
' The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
4
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance
with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make
payment on account thereof as provided therein.
` IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents h cuted this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
ATTE T:
gez&
ecretary
APPROVED S TO CON NT:
r
I
ZnLer'o®rsentative
APPROVED SASS f? FORM: �
7 CitYAttomey
t
ATTEST:
Corporate Secretary
CITY F BBC
AYOR
CONTRACTOR:
MIKE KLEIN GENERAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
PRINTED NAME: M 1 I44�— k LEA)
TITLE:
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Mike Klein General Contractors, Inc.
1340 E. 44th Street
Lubbock,Texas 79404
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
7
7 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
r
a
t I. OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it
shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be
understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to wit: MIKE KLEIN GENERAL
CONTRACTORS. INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal
representative.
f- 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
,., referring to, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including plans and
specifications, were prepared, and GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, who will inspect constructions; or to
such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular
under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's
r" Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting In behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to
Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or
words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order,
designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved,"
"Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the
Owner's Representative.
7 6. SUBCONTRACTOR
` The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor.
r
t 7. WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
I of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the
last business address known to him who gives the notice.
I
8. WORK
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials
or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer
such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract
documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended
purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. KAYO UT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him
and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the
work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or
the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner
that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be
responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the
basis of his onste observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to
guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the —
commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work
contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to
permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical
and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's
Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks,
etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his
Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at
Contractor's expense.
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such
stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and
disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases,
determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract.
He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases,
decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor.
The Owner's Representatives' estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right to any action on
the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract.
The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the
Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to
the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may
deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said
material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall
furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the
proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and
instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and
instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications
provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or
inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his
decision.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory
to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions
given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable
representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision
shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from Its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be bome by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this
contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before
or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
F
r
18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work
required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform
him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such
man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution
and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and
it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or
protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and
accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at
all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall
be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work.
Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and
testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any
observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to
the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject _
any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its
completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has
previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or
consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination
at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location
where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require
testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish
Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to
perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests
will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such
other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, _
be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be bome by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approval but does riot meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective.
Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
r
i
Neither observations by the Owner or Owners Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owners Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections,
tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the
requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
d_
It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not
in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice
thereof from the Owners Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such
work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action
contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractors expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof,
either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for
r a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount
of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual
loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally
planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owners Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not
covered by Contractors bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owners Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owners Representative; subject, however, to the right of
the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is
commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus
fifteen (15%) percent.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment,
r„ for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily
incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security,
Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all
other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owners Representative,
or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost
shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership
Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for
the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent
(15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead,
general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced
within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be
maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be
included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's --
Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what
does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists
upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order
and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C).
The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below
provided.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans
and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall
include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract
documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a
clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior
to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included
and has provided sufficient sums in his bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and
specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days
prior to the opening of bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality
of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order
the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and
equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded In accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or -
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and
save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any
�*
character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person
or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their
agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject
matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary
` barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained
against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an
Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given
by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work
progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption
of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors.
0M.
28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All
policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all
subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from
the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted.
The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a
subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate
of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,500,000
Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury
Advertising Injury
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance
i For bodily Injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1,500,000 Combined Single
Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
F
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit,
to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and
Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job
and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance Policy
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price
(100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $1.000,000 on all contracts with
coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability
coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.
1. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of
authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-
82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for
the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in ❑
entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the
project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless
of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent
contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of
any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the
project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or
materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services"
does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply
deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements _
of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services
on the project, for the duration of the project.
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
7
4.
5.
C:
7
If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the govemmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to
the governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter.
The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
B. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed
by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on
the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage
and report lack of coverage.
9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter;
7
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (1) - M, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will
provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -
Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the
Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as
evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative
of the insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date bome by
such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date bome by
such certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured ...
at the address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the
job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of
the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and
filling of any coverage agreements;
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new
certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on
the contractors current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so
the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing
coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must
be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and
any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be
the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any
additional words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services
related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation
Insurance. This Includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and
materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the
project, regardless of the Identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers` Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive
Information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your
employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to
provide coverage." and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(11) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(III) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in
subsection (e) (3) of this rule;
(iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the —
project;
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided
to the person for whom they are providing services.
29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990,
and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND
FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any
demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts
thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the
performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all
obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived.
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any Indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of _
those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within
five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain
unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness
or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness.
Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing.
7
E
r
IF
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device,
material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or
Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and
shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend
all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or
process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract
documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to
the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If
the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for
such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement.
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by
the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance
therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be
adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to
be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's
Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar
as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner
may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect
as though embodied herein.
33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the
fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or
materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to
the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement.
34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential
conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this
contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any
proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the
consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total
compensation, the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated
damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor
shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the
E completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this
locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the
impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event
sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner
from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment.
It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract.
35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor
shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such
manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of -�
prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance
with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided,
also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's _
Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts
will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the
Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
36. EXTENSION OF TIME
The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of
this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this
locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he
shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been
delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors
employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public
enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written
justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor.
The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the
Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then consider such written request and respond to
Contractor in writing granting or rejecting the request for an extension of time to complete the project.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the
time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to
such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be
made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work
embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for _
the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is
caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done
and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for `
estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. It is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be
I
r
�a
40.
41.
42.
43
furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment
under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials
furnished on the project.
PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining properly or properties in any way
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for
any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor
agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any
injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such
indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work.
PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work
by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
bid attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive
such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses
incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to
this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's
Representative.
PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have
not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application
for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of
the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment
showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last
day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of
the work that are to be fabricated into the work.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of
the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5%u of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to
completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual
delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written
recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage
due Contractor.
FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work
has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the
r
work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the
contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of
completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of
acceptance of the work to the Contractor.
44. FINAL PAYMENT
Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final
measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials fumished under the
terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the
31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this
agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said
payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of
acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of
the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this
contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's
Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not,
and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials
conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's
Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any
damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with
reasonable promptness.
47. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any
certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied. _
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which
will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
48. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owners Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's --
Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision
in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owners Representative, any demand
F
T
for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after
the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that
final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a
bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents.
49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written
notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of
the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the
Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete
the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery,
equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment
under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or
another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore
(except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph
24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the
cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for
within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either
of the following elective manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such
labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so
charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may
thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such
expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been
completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is
greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been
completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess
to the Owner, or
(b) The Owner, under seated bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper
having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion
of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In
case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been
the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and
j remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less
than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his
Surety shall be credited therewith.
When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and
certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A
complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct
shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the
Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date
of certificate of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would
have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this
contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner,
then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be tumed over to the
Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor
and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there
remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together
with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the
respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any
manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the
risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect
such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery,
equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the
Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the
Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain
on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners.
50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER
In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said
terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly
abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the
ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work.
Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, --
which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the
attached bid, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra
Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to _
cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot
be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by
deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained
by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the
Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by
said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement.
51. BONDS
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an
approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this
contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so fumished.
52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special
conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special _
conditions shall control.
53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be
done; or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same,
or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be
sustained and bome by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority
to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's _
work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested
in the Owner or Owner's Representative
hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an
independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own
employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials
and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case
of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
7
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
r
March 14, 1996
Item #19
RESOLUTION
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of
L
per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public
i works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's
" Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and
WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February
. 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, and further updated by
`
Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8, 1987; and
WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the
[
{
current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: i
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be
as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made
i
a part hereof for all intents and purposes: ,
Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades
Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction
Exhibit C. Overtime Rate
Exhibit D: Weekend and Holiday Rate '.
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem ;
f
wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and
such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law.
t,
I
i
t 1
t
Passed by the City Council this 14th
ATTEST:
&t—, I I (-�-&
Betty M. J nson, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
a4ol�
Mary AndrYws, Managing Director of
Human Resources
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
lid
a old Willard, Assistant City Attorney
H W : da/ccdocs/pubworks. res
February 14, 1996
1)
, 1996.
YOR
N:11:
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft Hourty Rate
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
10.00
Air Conditioner Installer
11.00
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
5.50
Asbestos Worker
8.00
Asbestos Supervisor
11.00
Bricklayer
11.00
Bricklayer -Helper
6.00
Carpenter
11.00
Carpenter -Helper
6.00
Cement Finisher
7.50
Drywall Hanger
10.00
Electrician
13.00
Electrician -Helper
6.00
Equipment Operator -Heavy
8.50
Equipment Operator -Light
7.50
Floor installer
8.50
Glazier
9.00
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
9.00
Insulator -Helper
5.50
Iron Worker
8.00
Laborer -General
5.50
Mortar Mixer
5.50
Painter
9.50
Plumber
10.50
Plumber -Helper
6.00
Roofer
8.00
Roofer -Helper
5.50
Sheet Metal Worker
8.75
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
5.50
Welder -Certified
10.00
W"I I W.-
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Asphalt Heaterman
6.00
Asphalt Shoveler
5.50
Concrete Finisher
7.35
Concrete Finisher -Helper
5.75
EIectrician
10.50
Flagger
5.50
Form Setter
6.50
Form Setter -Helper
5.50
Laborer -General
5.50
Laborer -Utility
6.25
Mechanic
7.25
Mechanic -Helper
5.50
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
7.00
Bulldozer
7.00
Concrete Paving Machine
7.00
Front End Loader
6.50
Heavy Equipment Operator
7.00
Light Equipment Operator
6.50
Motor Grader Operator
9.50
Roller
6.00
Scraper
6.50
Tractor
6.50
Truck Driver -Light
6.00
Truck Driver -Heavy
6.50
l*.q:II:
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate.
IF IT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Weekend and Holiday Rate
The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate.
SPECIFICATIONS
(� LUBBOCK MEMORIAL CIVIC CENTER
rr INTERIOR RENOVATION
i
9
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
SPECIFICATIONS
Project No. 9623.00
4
R�® ARC
Thompson, Ventulett, Stainback & Associates, Inc. Atlanta, Georgia 1230 Peachtree Street, NE Atlanta, GA 30309 404.888.6600
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION
LUBBOCK TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 003-1
Released for Latest
Section Number and Title Last Page Construction Revision
INTRODUCTORY PAGES
00 001
Title Page
00 003
Table of Contents
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
General Conditions of the Construction Contract
Provided by City of Lubbock
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 010
Summary of Work
01 027
Applications For Payment
01030
Alternates
01 035
Modification Procedures
01 045
Cutting and Patching
01300
Submittals
01 400
Quality Control
01 500
Construction Facilities &
Temporary Controls
01 541
Protection of Installed Work
01 600
Materials and Equipment
01631
Substitutions
01 700
Contract Closeout
01 999
List of Drawings
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02 071
Selective Demolition For Interiors
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Not Used
DIVISION
4 - MASONRY
Not Used
DIVISION
6 - METALS
Not Used
DIVISION
6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
06 402
Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION
7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Not Used
DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS
08 110
Steel Doors and Frames
08 710
Door Hardware
00 001-1 06/26/96
00 003-2 06/26/96
01010-2
06/26/96
01027-3
06/26/96
01030-2
06/26/96
01035-2
06/26/96
01045-3
06/26/96
01300-5
06/26/96
01400-3
06/26/96
01500-4
06/26/96
01
541-1
06/26/96
01600-3
06/26/96
01
631-2
06/26/96
01700-3
06/26/96
01999-2
06/26/96
02 071-5 06/26/96
06 402-7 06/26/96
08110-5 06/26/96
08 710-6 06/26/96
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION
r" LUBBOCK TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 003-2
Released for Latest
r Section Number and Title Last Page Construction Revision
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
r
09 255
Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 255-8
06/26/96
09 511
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 511-5
06/26/96
09 680
Carpet
09 680-8
06/26/96
09 920
Interior Painting
09 920-10
06/26/96
09 921
Mufti -color Interior Coatings
09 921-4
06/26/96
09 960
Fabric Wallcovering
09 960-6
06/26/96
09 985
Fabric -Wrapped Panels
09 985-4
06/26/96
DIVISION
10 - SPECIALTIES
10 265
10 425
Wall Surface Protection Systems
Signs
10 265-4
10 425-4
06/26/96
06/26/96
10 651
Operable Panel Partition Refurbishment
10 651-3
06/26/96
►-
DIVISION
11 -EQUIPMENT
11 132
Projection Screens
11 132-3
06/26/96
DIVISION
12 - FURNISHINGS
12 520
Motorized Shades
12 520-3
06/26/96
_
12 541
Draperies and Curtains
12 541-5
06/26/96
VISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15 010
General
15 010-5
06/26/96
15 020
Testing
15 020-2
06/26/96
15 250
Insulation
15 250-1
06/26/96
15 400
Plumbing
15 400-2
06/26/96
15 500
Automatic Fire Protection Systems
15 500-3
06/26/96
15 840
Ductwork
15 840-5
06/26/96
15870
Grilles, Registers and Ceilings Diffusers
15 870-2
06/26/96
DIVISION
16 - ELECTRICAL
16 010
General Electrical Provisions
16 010-5
06/26/96
16110
Raceways
16110-4
06/26/96
16120
Conductors
16120-2
06/26/96
16 130
Boxes and Fittings
16 130-3
06/26/96
16134
Panelboards
16134-2
06/26/96
16 140
Wiring Devices
16 140-2
06/26/96
16 170
Switches and Fuses
16 170-2
06/26/96
16 450
Grounding
16 450-3
06/26/96
16 460
Dry -Type Transformers
16 460-2
06/26/96
16 500
Lighting
16 500-3
06/26/96
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
F
4 LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 010
LUBBOCK TEXAS SUMMARY OF WORK 01 010-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
rA. The Project consists of Interior Renovation - Lubbock Memorial Civic Center.
1. Project Location: 1501 6th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79401
r 2. Owner: City of Lubbock, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas
I B. Contract Documents, dated June 18, 1996 were prepared for the Project by Thompson, Ventulett,
Stainback & Associates, Inc.; 2700 Promenade Two; 1230 Peachtree Street, NE; Atlanta, Georgia 30309
C C. The Work consists of
1. The Work includes, but is not limited to, all materials, labor, demolition and installation of the following:
new tufted carpet
new Axminster carpet (material by Owner)
new Banquet Hall ceiling
patchwork and painting
new wood paneling
new wallcovering
new light fixtures
new mechanical supply and return air grilles
new doors
new fabric wrapped panels
new signage
new draperies and stage curtains
new motorized shades
new motorized projection screens
new exit signs
new faucets
new toilet room accessories
removal of existing vinyl wallcovering and preparing wall surface for new paint finish.
1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within
contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is
indicated.
1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public.
2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available
to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas
for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for
storage of materials and equipment on -site.
B. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary
to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period with the use of barricades or
temporary walls.
1.4 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
k A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire construction
period. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize. conflicts and facilitate owner
usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations.
Fr
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 010
LUBBOCK TEXAS SUMMARY OF WORK 01 010-2
1.5 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. The Owner will furnish Axminster carpet to the job premises.
1. The Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner -furnished items.
2. Following delivery, the Contractor will inspect items delivered for damage.
3. If Owner -furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, the Owner will arrange for replacement.
4. The Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for the delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to the appropriate Contractor.
5. The Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner -furnished items and coordinate delivery
schedule with carpet manufacturer.
6. The Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, inspecting and handling Owner -furnished items
at the site.
7. The Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner -furnished items from damage, including damage
from exposure to the elements. The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of
his operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 027
LUBBOCK TEXAS APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01 027-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications
for Payment.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relates to this Section.
1. Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified in
Division 1 Section "Submittals."
I ,
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the
Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of the Architect.
c. Project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for
each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of Work.
c. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
d. Dollar value.
`.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents.
Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications
for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet
installed.
C
a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. Include requirements for
insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.
6. Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Unit -Cost Allowances: Show the line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost,
multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities from the best indication in the Contract
Documents.
8. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items
..,
are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and
Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general
overhead and profit margin for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may
be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general
overhead expense, at the Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract
Sum.
l
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 027
LUBBOCK, TEXAS APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01 027-2
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by
the Architect and paid for by the Owner.
1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and
the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment -Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the 15th day of each month. The
period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding
period and ends 15 days prior to the date for each progress payment.
C. Payment -Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for
Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a
person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return
incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use
updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by
the application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers
of lien and similar attachments, when required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information
related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens from
subcontractors, sub -subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous
application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on
each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.
4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver of mechanics lien
for the period of construction covered by the application.
a. Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved
with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with
submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of Values.
4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. Schedule of principal products.
6. Schedule of unit prices.
7. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final).
8. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
10. Copies of building permits.
11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work.
12. Initial progress report.
13. Report of preconstruction meeting.
14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
15. Performance and payment bonds.
16. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance.
17. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 027
LUBBOCK TEXAS APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01 027-3
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner
occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include:
a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
c. Test/adjust/balance records.
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
f. Final cleaning.
g. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.
h. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
i. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
I. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
1. Completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
4 3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
4 4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay.
5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner.
r 6. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
{ 7. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 030
r LUBBOCK, TEXAS ALTERNATES 01 030-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates.
1.3 ALTERNATES REQUIREMENTS
rA. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders for certain work defined in the Bidding
Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to
accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products,
r` materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
L 1. Costs listed for each Altemate shall include costs of related coordination, modifications, or
adjustments on the Bid Proposal Form.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
B. Selection: Selection by Owner may occur prior to the Contract Date, or may, by the Agreement, be
deferred for possible selection at a subsequent date.
C. Alternate Provisions:
1. Numbering: Each Alternate is identified by number, and describes the basic changes to be
incorporated into the Work, only when that Alternate is made a part of the Work by specific provisions
in the Owner -Contractor Agreement.
2. Language: Each Alternate contained herein is defined by abbreviated language, recognizing that
drawings and specification sections document the requirements. Information contained herein is
intended to summarize Alternates, but does not necessarily include references to every trade or every
operation involved.
3. Coordination: Coordination of related work is required to ensure that Work affected by each selected
aftemate is complete and interfaced with Work of alternates. Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work
as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project.
a. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the
7Alternate.
b. Referenced sections of specifications stipulate pertinent requirements to achieve the work
stipulated under each Altemate.
c. Coordinate pertinent related Work and modify surrounding Work to integrate work under each
�-► Altemate, and to provide complete construction required by Contract Documents, as affected by
! alternates, which are accepted and made a part of Contract.
' 4. Notification: Following award of Contract, prepare and distribute to each entity to be involved in
performance of Work, a notification of status of alternate. Indicate which alternates have been:
a. Accepted,
b. Rejected, and/or
c. Deferred for consideration at a later date.
d. Include full description of negotiated modifications to alternates, if any.
5. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: OPERABLE PANEL PARTITION REFURBISHMENT.
1. Remove and replace existing wallcovering on the operable partitions in the Banquet Hall as indicated
in Specification Section 10 651 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
r B. Alternate No. 2: MOTORIZED SHADES.
1. Provide materials, delivery and installation of Motorized Shades as indicated in the Drawings and
Specification Section 12 520 MOTORIZED SHADES.
7111
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 030
LUBBOCK, TEXAS ALTERNATES 01 030-2
C. Altemate No. 3: (Not Used)
D. Alternate No. 4: PUBLIC RESTROOM RENOVATIONS
1. Provide materials, delivery, and installation for Public Restroom renovation work as indicated in the
Drawings and in accordance with Specifications Sections:
a. 09 920 Painting
b. 06 400 Architectural Woodwork
2. Renovation to include the following Public Restrooms:
a. West side of Exhibit Hall: Men E142, Lounge E144, Women E145, Men E 159, Lounge E163, --
Women E 164
b. Meeting Room side of Pedestrian Mall: Women's Toilet M121, Men's Toilet M123
c. Banquet Hall side of Pedestrian Mall: Men's B 107, Women's B108
3. Altemate No. 4 description of Work: -'
a. Includes the following:
(1) Provide new paint finish on all previously painted existing surfaces: Doors & Door Frames,
Wall and Ceiling surfaces, bulkheads, soffits, mechanical grilles, etc.(patch surface cracks) _
(2) Remove existing wallcovering, refurbish substrate, paint
(3) Paint existing wood doors and frames
(4) Electrostatically paint existing metal toilet partitions
(5) Remove and replace towel and waste receptacle accessories.
(6) Remove and replace existing apron panels at sink vanities.
(7) Clean existing wall and floor, tile and grout
(8) Remove and replace light fixtures at sink vanities
(9) Remove and replace existing faucets; Provide water temperature control for automatic "infra-
red" control faucets; Remove and replace existing drain cover at sinks
E. Alternate No. 5: (Not Used.)
F. Altemate No. 6: (Not Used.)
G. Alternate No. 7: (Not Used.)
H. Alternate No. 8: RECESSED MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS - BANQUET HALL
1. Remove and replace all exiting with new, recessed motorized projection screens in sizes to match
existing. _
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION ( Not Used)
END OF SECTION
C LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 035
LUBBOCK TEXAS MODIFICATIGN PROCEDURES 01 035-1
l:
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract
modifications.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing
of allowances.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment' for administrative procedures governing Applications for
Payment.
4. Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving
adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, on AIA Form G710, Architect's Supplemental
Instructions.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes
in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the
description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them as an
instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the
change to the Architect for the Owner's review.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases
to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the
Contract Time.
B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforseen conditions require modifications to the Contract,
the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change
on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to
be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change requires
substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests.
1.5 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: For allowance -cost adjustment, base each Change Order Proposal on the
difference between the actual purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by the final measurement
of work -in -place. Where applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing
'" wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 035
LUBBOCK TEXAS MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 035-2
1. Include installation costs in the purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.
2. When requested, prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate the margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work claimed in the Change Orders related to unit -cost
allowances.
4. The Owner reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work -in -place by independent quantity
survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in
the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or the Contractor's handling, labor,
installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or
Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. The Owner will reject claims submitted later
than 21 days.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposal
Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714. The Construction
Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion
in a Change Order.
1. The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the change in the Work. It also
designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.7 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form G701.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01, 045
r LUBBOCK TEXAS CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 045-1
k.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other
construction activities.
2. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition` for demolition of selected portions of the building for
alterations.
3. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching
individual parts of the Work.
a. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division 15
Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and
electrical installations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time
cutting and patching will be performed if the Owner requires approval of these procedures before
proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the
proposal:
1.
Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and indicate why
it cannot be avoided.
2.
Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and
i,
other significant visual elements.
3.
List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.
4.
Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.
5.
Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will
be relocated and those that will be temporarily out -of -service. Indicate how long service will be
disrupted.
6.
Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect's right to
later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.4 QUALITY
ASSURANCE
A. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that
would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements
or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational
life or safety.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following
operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment.
b. Air or smoke barriers.
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
d. Fire protection systems.
e. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
f. Control systems.
g. Communication systems.
h. Electrical wiring systems.
r
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 045
LUBBOCK TEXAS CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 045-2
B. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces
in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and
patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and
replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1. If possible retain the original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch the exposed Work listed below.
If it is impossible to engage the original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced
and specialized firm.
a. Processed concrete finishes.
b. Stonework and stone masonry.
c. Matched -veneer woodwork.
d. Firestopping.
e. Window wall system.
f. Stucco and ornamental plaster.
g. Acoustical ceilings.
h. Carpeting.
I. Wall covering.
j. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and
with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match
existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be
used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be
performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action
before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or
relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching
at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 045
LUBBOCK, TEXAS CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 045-3
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining
construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer; comply with the
original Installer's recommendations.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into
concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a
diamond -core drill.
4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires
excavating and backfilling.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining
construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken
surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat.
3. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform
appearance.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar,
oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint
or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
END OF SECTION
r
r
r
t..
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 300
LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUBMITTALS _ 01 300-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance
of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule.
3. Shop Drawings.
4. Product Data.
S. Samples.
6. Quality assurance submittals.
B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for
requirements for administrative submittals.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" specifies requirements for submittal of the Schedule of
Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports.
3. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record
Documents and warranties at project closeout.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on -site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish
materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
f A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
r activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities
to avoid delay.
r.. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related
activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing
will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other
submittals until all related submittals are received.
3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process
submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals.
j" a. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must delay processing to
permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
b. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the
Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
B. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each
submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. The Architect will not accept
submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet,
record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Include
�^ Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 300
LUBBOCK TEXAS SUBMITTALS 01 300-2
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar -chart -type, contractor's construction
schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work."
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line
to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as
indicated in the "Schedule of Values."
2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work
progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.
3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible
media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.
4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements
involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically
the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.
5. Coordinate the Contractors Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules.
6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate
Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for
certification of Substantial Completion.
B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner,
subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete
parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no
longer involved in construction activities.
C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a complete
schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of
products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:
a. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
b. Related Section number.
c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples).
d. Name of the subcontractor.
e. Description of the part of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
g. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval.
B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, r
subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete
parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no
longer involved in construction activities.
C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate
deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard
information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to
the Project is not a Shop Drawing.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 300
LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUBMITTALS _ 01 300-3
t
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns,
templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
c 1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on
sheets at least 8-12 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 36 by 48 inches (890 by 1220
mm).
7. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 blue- or black -line prints for the Architect's review. The Architect will return
one print. .
8. Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black -line prints; submit 5 prints where required for maintenance
4 manuals. The Architect will retain 2 prints and return the remainder.
9. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.
1.8 PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data
includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color
charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes
information on several products that are not required, mark copiers to indicate the applicable
information. Include the following information:
a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b. Compliance with trade association standards.
c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e. Material Safety Data sheets with assurance of no asbestos containing materials.
f. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been
confirmed.
3. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of options
is required.
4. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required for
maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and will return the other marked with action taken
and corrections or modifications required.
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve
as the final submittal.
5. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers,
fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on
transmittal forms.
a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession.
b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.
1.9 SAMPLES
A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the
material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and
! pattern.
1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples
to match the Architect's sample. Include the following:
a. Specification Section number and reference.
b. Generic description of the Sample.
c. Sample source.
O` d. Product name or name of the manufacturer.
e. Compliance with recognized standards.
` f. Availability and delivery time.
e
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 300
LUBBOCK TEXAS SUBMITTALS 01 300-4
2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check
of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the
final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or
product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations.
3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices.
a. The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architect's notation, indicating
selection and other action.
4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,
connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 1 set.
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve
as the final submittal.
b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set.
B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers,
fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution
on transmittal forms.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS
A. Submit quality -control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions,
manufacturer's field reports, and other quality -control submittals as required under other Sections of the
Specifications.
B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or
installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer
certifying compliance with specified requirements.
1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized
to sign documents on behalf of the company.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent
testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
1.11 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Architect will
review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. The Architect will
mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows:
1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved," the Work covered by
the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final
payment depends on that compliance.
2. Final -But -Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved as Noted," the Work
covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the
submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.
3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Not Approved, Revise and
Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication,
delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit
without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" at
the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. --
4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other
activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required."
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION:a1 300
LUBBOCK TEXAS SUBMITTALS 01 300-5
�.., PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
r
4.
r
C
4
r
i LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 400
LUBBOCK TEXAS QUALITY CONTROL 01 400-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality -control services.
B. Quality -control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by
Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document
requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production
of standard products.
1. Specific quality -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections
that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard
products.
2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures
that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or
authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
E. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" specifies requirements for repair and restoration of
construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for development of a schedule of required tests
and inspections.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity,
Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality -control services specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included
in the Contract Sum.
1. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality -control
services are the Owners responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing
agency to perform those services.
B. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality -
control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements,
regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility.
1. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's
responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with
Contract Document requirements.
C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar
services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance
of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Provide access to the Work.
r 2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
J 3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the
agency in taking samples.
r4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
l ..
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 400
LUBBOCK TEXAS QUALITY CONTROL 01 400-2
5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
6. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require
control by the testing agency.
7. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
D. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum
of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar --
activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency shall submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect. If the
Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, In duplicate, of each inspection,
test, or similar service through the Contractor.
1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority
so directs.
2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Date of issue.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f. Designation of the Work and test method.
g. Identification of product and Specification Section. -'
h. Complete inspection or test data.
1. Test results and an interpretation of test results.
j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract
Document requirements.
I. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m. Recommendations on retesting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including —
independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of
Independent Laboratories "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and
that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.
1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by ~-
authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities, and protect repaired construction.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 400
i 1rci92ne%k TFYeS OUALITYCONtRC
C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION
l LMCC SECTION 01 500
INTERIOR RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
LUBBOCK TEXAS AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 500-1
d
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.
B. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Field offices and storage sheds.
2. Temporary enclosures.
3. Hoists and temporary elevator use.
4. Waste disposal services.
5. Rodent and pest control.
6. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
C. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Temporary fire protection.
2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
3. Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site.
4. Environmental protection.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of the date established for commencement
of the Work, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Building code requirements.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules.
5. Environmental protection regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition
Operations," ANSI Al Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and
NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."
r
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before
use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
f " 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each
temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service.
B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a
f... safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not
overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire -prevention measures.
Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist
on -site.
C;
LMCC SECTION 01 500
INTERIOR RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
LUBBOCK TEXAS AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 500-2
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged,
previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Paint: Comply with requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame -spread rating of 15 or less.
For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon -reinforced, laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl
chloride, fire -retardant tarpaulins.
D. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged,
previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion -resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet
(30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system.
Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.
C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to
120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground -fault circuit
interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.
D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard -service cords where exposed to
abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single
lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length -
voltage ratio.
E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate
illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered -glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide
exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION _..
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the --
Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and
modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not -'
remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent
facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing
service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, _
compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations.
1. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to
make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide
trucked -in services.
` LMCC SECTION 01 500
INTERIOR RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
r" LUBBOCK TEXAS AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 500-3
L
3. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or
Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for
Change Orders.
B. Temporary Lighting: When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with
local switching.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without
operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
Y
C. Toilets: Use of the Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, so long as facilities are cleaned and
maintained in a condition acceptable to the Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to
s•"' the condition prevalent at the time of initial use.
1.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
F', A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy
access.
1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion.
r„ Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under
conditions acceptable to the Owner.
B. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply
with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce
requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary
waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.
1.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of
temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer,
as requested by the Architect.
B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and
maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable
and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and
NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations."
1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than
one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire -protection facilities,
stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure
areas.
4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete installation
of the permanent fire -protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use.
Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of
structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform
personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide
lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of
construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar
violations of security.
r
r
LMCC SECTION 01 500
INTERIOR RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
LUBBOCK, TEXAS AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 500-4
1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft,
provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material
to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.
F. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in
ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air,
waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result.
Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise -making tools and
equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.
1.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities
to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by
freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar
facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of
damage.
2. Protection: Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect
from damage during excavation operations.
C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each
temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or
no laterthan Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean
exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner
reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction
period including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings.
b. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use.
END OF SECTION
1 LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 541
i^ LUBBOCK TEXAS PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 01 541-1
f
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A.
Protect installed products and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent
operations.
B.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and
adjacent to traffic areas.
C.
Cover walls and floors of elevator cabs, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction
personnel.
D.
Protect finished floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage:
1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic.
2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects.
3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place in areas where storage of products will occur.
i.
E.
Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:
.•
1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from Installer.)
G
(manufacturer.) Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent
unprotected areas.
F.
Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.
END OF SECTION
F.
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 600
LUBBOCK TEXAS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 600-1
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection
of products for use in the Project.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Construction
Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" specifies administrative procedures for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract
Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms.
Such terms are self-explanatory and have well -recognized meanings in the construction industry.
1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.
2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise
fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that
requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to the Architect. Include
generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names
for each item listed.
1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals.
2. Form: Prepare product list with information on each item tabulated under the following column
headings:
a. Related Specification Section number.
b. Generic name used in Contract Documents.
c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
d. Manufacturer's name and address.
e. Supplier's name and address.
f. Installer's name and address.
g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial
product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract
requirements.
a. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in the Contract period.
4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the
completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations
from Contract requirements.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 600
LUBBOCK TEXAS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 600-2
5. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the
completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers
or products but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract
Documents. The Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing
a brief explanation of reasons for this action.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source.
1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce a quantity
adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Architect to determine
the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes, such as
visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select
products from sources producing products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.
B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products
for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even
if previously selected products were also options.
C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or
producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in
occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for
observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and
methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable,
hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container
or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,
protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that
products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or
counting of units.
6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the
supporting construction.
7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity
within range required by manufacturer's instructions.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details —
needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced
and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product
selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following:
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 600
LUBBOCK, TEXAS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 600-3
1. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or
manufacturers, provide 1 of the products Indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
2. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing
exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or
assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
3. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance
requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the
manufacturer for the application indicated.
a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the
manufacturer's certification of performance.
4. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance
with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards,
codes, or regulations specified.
5. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with
other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning
"substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category.
6. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the! phrase "... as selected from
manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ..." or a similar phrase, select a product and
manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color,
pattern, and texture from the product line selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the
applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other
Work.
1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 631
(r" LUBBOCK TEXAS SUBSTITUTIONS 01 631-1
P
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions
made after award of the Contract.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submitting the Contractor's Construction
Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies requirements governing the Contractor's
selection of products and product options.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract
Documents.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the
Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be
requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:
1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the
Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this
Section for substitutions.
2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents.
4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by
governing authorities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60
days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement of
the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.
1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and
according to procedures required for change -order proposals.
2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include
related Specification Section and Drawing numbers.
3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the
following information, as appropriate:
a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the
Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors, that will be
necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.
b. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size,
durability, and visual effect.
c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation
procedures.
d. Samples, where applicable or requested.
e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule
compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed
substitution on overall Contract Time.
f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.
g. The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in the
Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 631
LUBBOCK TEXAS SUBSTITUTIONS 01 631-2
h. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become
necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.
4. Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the
Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or
one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will
be in the form of a change order.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when one
or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions
are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with
these requirements.
1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.
4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The
Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure
to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.
B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples
for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or
valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval.
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
l LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 700
LUBBOCK, TEXAS CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 700-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal.
4. Submittal of warranties.
5. Final cleaning.
B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in
Divisions 2 through 16.
?� 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is
claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and
a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of
incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.
2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and
similar documents.
3. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
4. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement
surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
7. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.
8. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.
B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with
inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially
complete.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final
payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where
required.
2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.
3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected,
endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 700
LUBBOCK TEXAS CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 700-2
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the
date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility
for corresponding elements of the Work.
5. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work,
including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose
completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect.
1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the
Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations
that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.
1.6 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from
deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the
Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white -prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies
substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing
conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the
corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that
would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in
separate categories of the Work.
2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop
Drawings.
3. Note related change -order numbers where applicable.
4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable -paper cover sheets;
print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.
C. Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet with
the Architect and the Owner's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to be
transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Owner's instructions regarding delivery
to the Owner's Sample storage area.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of
miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work.
Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and
place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and
reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records.
E. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size.
Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3-ring, vinyl -covered binders, with
pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each
binder. Include the following types of information:
1. Emergency instructions.
2. Spare parts list.
3. Copies of warranties.
4. Wiring diagrams.
5. Inspection procedures.
6. Shop Drawings and Product Data.
7. Fixture lamping schedule.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 01 700
LUBBOCK TEXAS CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 700-3
r
k PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular
maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and
maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in
operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items:
1. Maintenance manuals.
2. Record documents.
3. Spare parts and materials.
4. Identification systems.
5. Control sequences.
6. Hazards.
7. Cleaning.
S. Warranties and bonds.
B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
1. Startup.
2. Shutdown.
3. Emergency operations.
4. Safety procedures.
5. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning
is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface
or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Final
Acceptance.
a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing
compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision -obscuring materials. Replace
chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains,
films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other
substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
e. Clean development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas
broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits.
C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work
during construction.
D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning.
Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not
discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from
the site and dispose of lawfully.
1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's
property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
f'
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
LIST OF DRAWINGS
01 999-1
Date Latest
Sheet No.
Sheet Title
Issued Revision
ARCHITECTURAL
AO-1.1
TITLE, LEGEND, INDEX & NOTES
06/26/96
A2-1.1
LOWER LEVEL, MAIN LEVEL &
UPPER LEVEL REFERENCE PLANS
06/26/96
A4-1.1
BANQUET HALL ENLARGED PLAN &
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
06/26/96
A4-1.2
BANQUET HALL PLAN, REFLECTED
CEILING PLAN & ELEVATIONS
06/26/96
A4-1.3
DETAILS
06/26/96
A4-2.1
PEDESTRIAN MALL LOWER LEVEL,
MAIN LEVEL & UPPER LEVEL PLANS
06/26/96
A4-2.2
PEDESTRIAN MALL ELEVATIONS
06/26/96
A4-2.3
DETAILS
06/26/96
A4-3.1
MEETING ROOM PLANS, ELEVATIONS
& DETAILS
06/26/96
A4-4.1
EXHIBIT HALL MAIN LEVEL & UPPER
LEVEL PLANS
06/26/96
A4-4.2
EXHIBIT HALL ELEVATIONS
06/26/96
A4-5.1
THEATER PLAN & ELEVATIONS
06/26/96
A5-1.1
CARPET PLAN
06/26/96
ELECTRICAL / MECHANICAL
ME1-1.1
BANQUET HALL MECHANICAL &
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN
06/26/96
M1-1.1.1
BANQUET HALL MECHANICAL
FLOOR PLAN
06/26/96
E1-1.1
BANQUET HALL ELECTRICAL FLOOR
PLAN
06/26/96
E1-1.2
BANQUET HALL ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES
& DETAILS
06/26/96
ME1-2.1
PEDESTRIAN MALL MECHANICAL &
ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN
06/26/96
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 02 071
LUBBOCK TEXAS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR INTERIORS 02 071-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
F1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected interior portions of a building.
2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Work" for use of the building and phasing requirements.
2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition
operations.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary
construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental
protection measures for selective demolition operations.
4. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for record document requirements.
5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for material and construction requirements for
temporary enclosures.
r. 6. Division 15 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
s 7. Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to
remain the Owners property.
B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property.
F Remove and deliver to Owners designated storage area.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse;
store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective
demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage
location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.
1A MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to
remain the Owners property, demolished materials shall become the Contractors property and shall be
removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option.
B. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, commemorative plaques and
tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered during
selective demolition, remain the Owners property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in
a manner to prevent damage and deliver to the Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
r+ B. Proposed dust -control measures.
C. Proposed noise -control measures.
1
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 02 071
LUBBOCK TEXAS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR INTERIORS 02 071-2
D. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each
activity.
2. Interruption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing space and of Owner's partial
occupancy of completed Work.
6. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
E. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.
F. Inventory of items to be removed by Owner.
G. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions, including finish surfaces and
adjoining construction that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations.
Submit prior to start of Work.
H. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.
I. Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to
accept hazardous wastes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective
demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective
demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct
selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours'
notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written
permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical
D. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any materials suspected
of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and
the Owner.
1. Asbestos will be removed by Owner before start of Work.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire -protection services during selective demolition operations,
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule selective demolition so as not to interfere with Owner's, building manager's, and other tenants'
on -site operations.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 02 071
!� LUBBOCK, TEXAS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR INTERIORS 02 071-3
r
i
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
` A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and
salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function
or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly
submit a written report to the Architect.
E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural
�! deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective
i demolition.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing
7" by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as
t acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities.
1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, shut off, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services
serving space to be selectively demolished.
1. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass
connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with
selective demolition.
2. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining
portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and
sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition until utility disconnecting and sealing
have been completed and verified in writing.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 02 071
LUBBOCK, TEXAS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR INTERIORS 02 071-4
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids,
flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.
B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with walkways,
corridors, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed
or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent facilities to remain.
Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.
1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during
selective demolition operations.
3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to
separate areas from fumes and noise.
E. Provide and maintain interior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent
movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt.
Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.
1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
C. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure.
D. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as
indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as
follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods
least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of
adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,
such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -
cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations.
4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
5. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly
dispose of off -site.
6. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials so
as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
7. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On -site storage or sale of removed items is
prohibited.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 02 071
LUBBOCK, TEXAS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION.FOR INTERIORS 02 071-5
�•. 8. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective
demolition operations.
9. Remove existing vinyl wallcovering where indicated in construction documents. Clean wall surface
of all adhesive and residue.
B. Comply with building manager's regulations for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading
docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective
demolition operations.
B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate
on -site.
B. Burning: Do not bum demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off the Project site and legally dispose of them.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Sweep the Project site broom clean on completion of selective demolition operations.
END OF SECTION
F
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 06 402
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 402-1
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
Interior standing and running trim.
2.
Wood cabinets (casework).
3.
Plastic -laminate countertops.
4.
Flush wood paneling and wainscots.
5.
Shop finishing of woodwork.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing
woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
C 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and
reinforcing specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and
other items installed in architectural woodwork.
C. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturers color charts consisting of actual
units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type
of material indicated.
1. Shop -applied transparent finishes.
2. Shop -applied opaque finishes.
3. Plastic laminates.
4. Solid surfacing materials.
D. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm), for each species and cut, finished on one
side and one edge.
2. Wood -veneer -faced panel products, with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm),
for each species and cut. Include at least one face -veneer seam and finish one-half of face as
specified.
3. Lumber with shop -applied opaque finish,10 inches, for each finish system and color, with one-half of
exposed surface finished.
E. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified
requirements.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance' Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 06 402
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 402-2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production
capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Single -Source Responsibility: Arrange for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence -
matched wood veneers by a single firm.
C. Single -Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to
assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and installing woodwork specified in this Section.
D. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork
Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.
a. Provide AWI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that woodwork meets
requirements of grades specified.
E. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide materials with the following fire -test -response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL,
Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify fire -retardant -treated material with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint
on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.
1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values indicated below, tested per ASTM E 84 for
standard time period (10 minutes).
a. Flame Spread: 75.
b. Smoke Developed: 450.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in
"Project Conditions."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Obtain and comply with woodwork fabricator's and Installer's coordinated
advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. —'
Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork will
be within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through
remainder of construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork
by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop
drawings.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of
Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and
installed as indicated.
L LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 06 402
LUBBOCK TEXAS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 402-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of
woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior woodwork,
with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
«- 2. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
3. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
B. Formaldehyde Emission Level for Medium -Density Fiberboard: Comply with requirements of NPA 9.
C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required
by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates
by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Laminart.
c. Nevamar Corp.
d. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
2.2 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire -retardant chemical formulations indicated
by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to produce products
with fire -test -response characteristics specified.
B. Fire -Retardant Chemicals: Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely
affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material.
C. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber: Comply with the following:
1. Organic -Resin -Based Formulation: Exterior type per AWPA C20, consisting of organic -resin solution,
relatively insoluble in water, thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
D. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the follwing requirements, made from softwood
particles and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve products
identical to those tested for flame spread of 25 of less and for smoke developed of 25 or less per ASTM
E 84 by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. For panels 3/ inch (19 mm) thick and less and 45-Ib/cu. ft. (720-kg/cu. m) density, comply with ANSI
A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11
Mpa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2000 Mpa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw -
holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf (1100 N) and 225 lbf (1000 N) respectively.
E. Fire -Retardant Fiberboard: Medium -density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from
softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel
manufacture to achieve products identical to those tested for flame spread of 25 or less and for smoke
developed of 200 or less per ASTM E 84 by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Medite FR by Medite Corp.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
r A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets,
except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 06 402
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 402-4
B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or
referenced to this standard.
C. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish to match existing hardware.
D. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements of BHMA A156.9.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire -retardant -treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18.6.1 for
applicable requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal -framing manufacturer.
C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for
applicable requirements.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and
elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for
drilled -in -place anchors.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard and
of the following grade:
1. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture
content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation
areas.
C. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
following:
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project
site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. `
1. Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install
dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting.
Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field
measurements indicated on approved shop drawings before disassembling for shipment.
F. Shop -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams _
to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating.
2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH & REVEALS AT WOOD PANELING
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for
members with ends exposed in finished work.
C. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 06 402
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 402-5
2.7 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets.
1. Grade: Premium
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Provide door front on existing casework at Terrace Suite as indicated
on Drawings.
C. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Any closed grain hardwood listed in referenced woodwork
standards
2.8 LAMINATE -CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC - COVERED CASEWORK)
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate -clad casework.
1. Grade: Premium.
B. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate, complying with the following
requirements:
1. Veritcal Surfaces: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
2. Edges: Solid surfacing laminate, GP-50, 0.050-inch (0.711 mm) nominal thickness
C. Colors, Patterns, Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed
surfaces complying with the following requirements.
1. Provide Architect with selection from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following
categories:
a. Solid colors
b. Solid colors, with core same color as surfaces.
2.9 FLUSH WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood paneling.
1. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species: Red oak, rift sliced.
1. Lumber Trim and Edges: At panelwork fabricators option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood
(except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain and color of
veneered panels.
C. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match.
D. Vertical Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: End match.
E. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Balance match.
F. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: . Provide panels composed of wood veneer and fire -retardant
particleboard that are identical in construction to units tested for the following surface -burning
characteristics per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Identify panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency
on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.
1. Flame Spread: 75 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
2.10 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated.
B. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, regardless of
r whether shop applied or applied after installation.
1. Shop Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at the fabrication shop.
Defer only final touch up, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 06 402
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 402-6
C. General: The priming and shop finishing (if any) of interior architectural woodwork required to be
performed at the fabrication shop are specified in this Section.
D. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as
applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces
of woodwork, including backs of trim, paneling, and the underside of countertops. Apply 2 coats to
back of paneling. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate -clad woodwork do not require backpriming
when surfaced with plastic laminate or thermoset decorative overlay.
E. Open Finish for Open -Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open -grain woods.
F. Filled Finish for Open -Grain Woods: After staining (H any), apply paste wood filler to open -grain woods
and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
1. Apply vinyl washcoat sealer after staining and before filling.
G. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and
sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System TR-4: Conversion varnish.
3. Staining: None required.
4. Sheen: Satin 30-50 gloss units.
H. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, color, effect, and
sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work _
as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
32 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in
Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level (including
tops).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire -retardant -treated wood to comply with
recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer, including those for adhesives used to install
woodwork.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds,
stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete
installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 06 402
LUBBOCK TEXAS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 402-7
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from
maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36
inches (900 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Fill
gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood
base, R finished.
1. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) variation
from a straight line.
G. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Calk space between
backsplash and wall with specified sealant.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
H. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel -hanger clips and by blind nailing
on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing. Do not face nail
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.5 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow
and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that
ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
F
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08110
LUBBOCK, TEXAS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 110-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
4
A.
This Section includes steel doors and frames.
r
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping.
2. Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum board partitions.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials,
dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound rating:., profiles, and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each
frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and
installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
l
D.
Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples not less than 3 by
5 inches (75 by 125 mm) and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work.
r"
1 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSVSDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies
tested for fire -test -response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock
Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Temperature -Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450
deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
r
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished
items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items
as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high
wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.
r If cardboard wrappers on,doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch
(6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08110
LUBBOCK TEXAS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 110-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Curries co.
2. Fenestra Corp.
3. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
4. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
5. Benchmark Commercial Doors.
6. Ceco Door Products.
7. Copco Door Co.
8. Curries Co.
9. Deansteel Manufacturing Co.
10. Fenestra Corp. _
11. Kewanee Corp.
12. Mesker Door, Inc.
13. Pioneer Industries.
14. Republic Builders Products.
15. Steelcraft.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial -quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with
ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M).
B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial quality,
or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M),
commercial quality, or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot -dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 (ASTM A 525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating designation, mill
phosphatized.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick steel sheet; 0.0516-
inch- (1.3-mm-) thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior
walls, hot -dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
2.3 DOORS
A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models
specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-)
thick cold -rolled steel sheet faces.
2. Exterior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0516-inch- (1.3-mm-)
thick galvanized steel sheet faces.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors, according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on
Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames for interior
use of minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick cold -rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of
single -door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -door frames.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08110
r LUBBOCK TEXAS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 110-3
C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes
at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to
close off interior of openings.
D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry."
t
' 2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or
buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturers plant. Clearly identify work that cannot
be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply
with ANSVSDI 100 requirements.
1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturers standard core materials according to SDI
standards:
a. Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets.
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (32 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4
mm) between non -fire -rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom.
a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold -
rolled steel sheet.
C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold -
or hot -rolled steel sheet.
E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and
frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as
an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick galvanized
steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of
doors against water penetration.
1. At exterior locations.
F. Exposed Fasteners-. Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
G. Thermal -Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations, provide doors fabricated as thermal -
insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully
operable door assemblies.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal -rated assemblies with U-value rating of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft.
x h x deg F (2.33 W/sq. m x K) or better.
r�
H. Sound -Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown, provide door and frame assemblies fabricated as
sound -reducing type, tested according to ASTM E 1408, and classified according to ASTM E 413.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with STC sound ratings of 33 or better.
I
I. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with
applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation
for hardware.
J. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, 9 not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware
Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating
finishes.
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08110 _
LUBBOCK TEXAS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 110-4
B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet finishes.
C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication.
2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied
over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint
specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel,
with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P- y
21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air-dried
primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. _
1. Shop Primer: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT-
P-641, Type IL
2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic
coating applied over ft.
C. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance
criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation
for field -applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data,
and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately
in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction,
place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge
jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors
and masonry T-shaped anchors.
3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb
adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and
secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices.
4. In metal -stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel -stud
partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
5. In in -place gypsum board partitions, install knock -down, slip-on, drywall frames.
6. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in
ANSVSDI 100.
1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80.
2. Smoke -Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION
SECTION.0. 8
F:m nObRS AND FF
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and
frames.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08 710
LUBBOCK TEXAS DOOR HARDWARE 08 710-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing
folding doors. Provide hardware for each new door identified to comply vAth the function and quality of
each existing door that it replaces.
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Hinges.
2. Lock cylinders and keys.
3. Lock and latch sets.
4. Bolts.
5. Exit devices.
6. Closers.
7. Miscellaneous door control devices.
8. Door trim units.
9. Weatherstripping for exterior doors.
10. Sound stripping for interior doors.
11. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors.
12. Thresholds.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers integral with hollow metal frames.
D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:
1. Cylinders for locks on entrance doors.
1.3 HARDWARE ALLOWANCE
A. Selection and Ordering: Furnish door hardware as selected by Architect and in such quantities to replace
existing door hardware on door to be replaced.
B. Door hardware supplier's responsibilities shall be as follows:
1. Submittals: Submit through Contractor required product data, final hardware schedule, separate
keying schedule, and samples as specified in this Section, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor promptly of estimated times and dates that will be required
to process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver hardware, and to perform other work associated
with furnishing door hardware for purposes of including this data in construction schedule. Comply
with this schedule.
3. Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as required to coordinate hardware with other work
in respectto both fabrication and installation. Furnish Contractor with templates and deliver hardware
to proper locations.
4. Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and inventory door hardware specified in this Section.
5. Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at time of door
hardware selection, furnish types, finishes, and quantities of door hardware, including fasteners, and
Owner's maintenance tools required to comply with specified requirements and as needed to install
and maintain hardware. Furnish or replace any items of door hardware resulting from shortages and
incorrect items at no cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed receipts from Contractor for all
delivered materials.
C. Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows:
1. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for door hardware in same manner as submittals for
other work.
4.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08 710
LUBBOCK TEXAS DOOR HARDWARE 08 710-2 ^'
2. Construction Schedule: Cooperate with door hardware supplier in establishing scheduled dates for
submittals and delivery of templates and door hardware. Incorporate in construction schedule the
times and dates related to furnishing hardware by door hardware supplier.
3. Coordination: Coordinate door hardware with other Work. Furnish hardware supplier or manufacturer
with shop drawings of other work where required or requested. Verify completeness and suitability of hardware with supplier.
4. Product Handling: Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the site. Inventory hardware
jointly with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials.
5. Installation Information: The general types and quantities of hardware required in order to replace or --
duplicate existing hardware functions on doors to be replaced.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
sections.
B. Product data including manufacturers'technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation
instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show
compliance with requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware
sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the
following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and
in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. ,
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance
of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction
schedule. Include with schedule the _product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by
door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.
D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door
hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating
and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.)
from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in
the Projects vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware
similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced
architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at
reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in
writing.
C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard
No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are
listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting
organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in
compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 06 710
M LUBBOCK. TEXAS DOOR HARDWARE _ 08 710-3
k
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include
basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier
from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware
set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be
packed in same container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each
is satisfied that count is correct.
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement
of door hardware.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Butts and Hinges:
a. Bommer Industries, Inc.
b. Hager Hinge Co.
c. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
2.
Cylinders and Locks: Match existing key system
a. Best Lock Corp.
I
b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
c. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
d. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
e. Yale Security Inc.
3.
Exit/Panic Devices:
a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
!'
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
I:
c. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
4.
Door Control Devices:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
c. Glynn -Johnson Corp.
d. Hager Hinge Co.
,..
e. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
5.
Door Stripping and Seals:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
6.
Thresholds:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
7.
Astragals
a. Hager Hinge Co.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08 710
LUBBOCK TEXAS DOOR HARDWARE 08 710-4
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's
standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially
recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA Al56 series
standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA Al 56.18 for finish designations indicated.
Do not fumish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal
screws, except as specifically indicated.
C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as
otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or,
if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including
"prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent
no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only
means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as
a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
2.3 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
A. Templates: Except for hinges and frames, provide only template -produced units.
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements:
1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Out -Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins.
2. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT)
indicated.
D. Number of Hinges: Provide not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and
one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.
1. Fire -Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same
rule for additional hinges.
2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required, either new or integrated with
Owner's existing system.
B. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual
change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
1. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol,
and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
C. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
D. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5
grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
1. Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08 710
LUBBOCK TEXAS DOOR HARDWARE 08 710-5
i
2. Deliver keys to key control system manufacturer.
3. Deliver keys to Owner.
2.5 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip
extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/24nch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum
12-inch-long rod for doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding
7'-0" in height.
2.6 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use.
1. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated.
2.7 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on
interior doors. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable
and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer strips,
surface applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised, and of following metal, finish, and resilient
bumper material:
1. Solid neoprene conforming to MIL R 6855, Class II, Grade 40.
a. Flexible, hollow bulb or loop insert.
2.8 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile
as shown or scheduled.
B. Exterior Hinged or Pivoted Doors: Provide units not less than 4 inches wide, formed to accommodate
change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door
frames, and as follows:
1. For in -swinging doors provide units with interlocking lip and interior drain channel; include hook on
bottom edge of door and drain pan.
2. For out -swinging doors provide units with interlocking lip and with hook on bottom edge of door to act
as weather bar.
3. For out -swinging doors provide rabbeted type units with replaceable weatherstrip insert in stop.
2.9 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or
push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match those existing or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard
product line.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other
qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less, than specified by referenced
standards for the applicable units of hardware.
0
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 08 710
LUBBOCK, TEXAS DOOR HARDWARE 08 710-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect.
1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door
and Hardware Institute.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted
or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface
protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items
until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and
anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturers instructions and recommendations to the extent
installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function
of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the
application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space
or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final
check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as ._
necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices
to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. —
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 255
!" LUBBOCK. TEXAS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 255-1
R
t
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
3. Gypsum board assemblies attached to existing substrate conditions.
4. Fiber -reinforced gypsum wallboard.
5. Glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum backing board installed with gypsum board assemblies.
6. Resurfacing or repainting existing wall surfaces where vinyl wallcovering is to be removed.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for
gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board
assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Single -Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel
products from a single manufacturer.
C. Single -Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same
manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable
to gypsum board manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside undercover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum
panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and
finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than
40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F
(35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 255
LUBBOCK TEXAS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 255-2
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot,
dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
b. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
c. Unimast, Inc.
2. Grid Suspension Assemblies:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. USG Interiors, Inc.
3. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
b. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
c. United States Gypsum Co.
d. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, cast -in -place concrete inserts, or other devices appropriate for
anchorage to the form of structural framing indicated and whose suitability for use intended has been
proven through standard construction practices and certified test data. Hanger anchorage device
assemblies shall be designed and engineered by the metal support system manufacturer to meet the
structure performance criteria specified herein and as appropriate for anchorage of the metal support
system to the structural framing.
1. Structural Performance Criteria: Sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by
ceiling/soffit construction assembly, seismic loading and wind loading (for exterior soffit conditions)
as set forth by the Building Code, for applications indicated and as determined by testing per ASTM
E488 conductec by a qualified independent testing laboratory, or as engineered by a structural
engineer registered in the State.
2. Cast -In -Place and Post -Installed Inserts in Concrete: —
a. General: Post -installed powder acturated fasteners will not be acceptable.
b. Material:
(1) Interior: Non -corrosive
(2) Environmental Exposure or Exterior: Stainless Steel
c. Accpetable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements and job conditions
shown on the Drawings, provide inserts by one of the following:
(1) Hilti _
(2) Ramset
C. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
D. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.1-mm)
diameter.
E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint.
F. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint.
G. Angle -Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) wide, formed from 0.0635-inch-
(1.6-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G 90 (ASTM A 653M, Z 180) coating
designation, with bolted connections and 5/1 6-inch (8-mm) diameter bolts.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 265.
LUBBOCK TEXAS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 255-3
H. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and
4 doubled over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following
4 requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
r 3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating.
4. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant coating.
I. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturers standard direct -hung grid
suspension system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that Interlock to form a modular
supporting network.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:
r, 1. Protective Coating: Manufacturers standard corrosion -resistant coating.
' B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled
over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements
for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Deflection Track: Manufacturers standard top runner designed to prevent cracking of gypsum board
applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of the structure above fabricated from steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M). Thickness as indicated
for studs, and width to accommodated depth of studs, and of the following configuration:
1. Top Runner with Compressible Flanges: 2-1/2-inch- (63.5-mm-) deep flanges with V-shaped offsets
that compress when pressure is applied from construction above.
D. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal as follows:
j 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).
E. Furring Brackets: Serrated -arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion -resistant steel sheet
complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm),
designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring.
1. Double -Leg Configuration: Hat -shaped channel with 1-1/2-inch- (38.1-mm-) wide face connected to
flanges by double -slotted or expanded -metal legs (webs).
F. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates
involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.
2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end -
to -end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application.
�.,. 1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm).
,. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Sag -resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 FIBER -REINFORCED GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Provide fiber -reinforced gypsum wallboard, of thickness and width indicated below, and in maximum
lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 255
LUBBOCK, TEXAS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 255-4
1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 7116 inch (11.1 mm), unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Width: 48 inches (1219 mm).
3. Edges: Tapered
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fiber -reinforced wallboard that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Fiberbond Wallboard; Louisiana-Pacific Corporation
2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with
ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: _
1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement:
a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip process or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
a. Comerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead where
indicated.
c. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint _..
compound. Use U-bead where indicated.
2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both
the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Fiber -Reinforced Wallboard: As recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer.
C. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory -packaged vinyl -based products complying
with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory -mixed product.
a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face
flanges of trim accessories.
b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
c. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
D. Joint Compound for Fiber -Reinforced Wallboard: Material recommended by manufacturer.
2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings
in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90. _
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic -rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to
reduce transmission of airborne sound.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: --
a. PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands.
b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
c. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
7
i LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 255
LUBBOCK TEXAS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 255-5
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced
standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels.
C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommended for spot -grouting hollow metal door
frames.
D. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557.
E. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel
framing.
F. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick.
2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members.
3. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
G. Steel drill screws of size and type recommended by unit manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer
units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames,
cast -in -anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1 A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead
structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have
been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to
support ceilings.
L i 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with
ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to
support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar
4 construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer
or, K none available, with United States Gypsum Co: s "Gypsum Construction Handbook."
3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that
are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required
to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 255
LUBBOCK, TEXAS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 255-6
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install
supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size
supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits
established by referenced standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews,
or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will
not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as
well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Wire Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross -furring or
grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) as measured both
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
E. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.
F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets
vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut
to fit into wall track.
G. For exterior soffits, install cross -bracing and additional framing to resist wind uplift according to details
on Drawings.
3.5 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud
assemblies abut other construction.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not
vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except
where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors
and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum
board.
D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated.
1. Single -Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board --
panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-219, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum
board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly
to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head
and secure to jamb studs.
1. Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. _
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 255
LUBBOCK, TEXAS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES _ 09 255-7
2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) clearance
from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.
3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.
G. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as
required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door
heads.
3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
` A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with
ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound -attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not
less than one framing member.
D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels
together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space
between panels. Do not force into place.
E. Locate both edge or end 'pints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports
or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut
edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints
at comers of framed openings where possible.
F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.
Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum
panels over wood framing, with floating internal comer construction.
J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing
standard and manufacturers recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
3.7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated,
and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.
3. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing). Use maximum -
length panels to minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.
' B. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and gypsum
wallboard face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 255
LUBBOCK TEXAS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 255-8
C. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
2. Fasten to wood supports with adhesive and supplementary nails or screws.
D. Direct -Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening
adhesive has set.
3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten
gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for
type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install comerbead at external comers.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with
face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated.
1. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can _
be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.
3. Install U-bead where indicated.
D. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and in specific
locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board
surfaces for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint compound. _
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring
tape.
D. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214.
1. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Use one of the following joint compound combinations as applicable to the finish levels specified:
F. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish
(third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand
between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for
decoration.
G. Finish cementitious backer units to comply with unit manufacturer's directions.
H. Fill or repair all open joints, uneven surfaces and damaged areas of existing wall surfaces where vinyl
wallcovering was removed to Level 4 gypsum board finish.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum
board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 511
LUBBOCK, TEXAS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 511-1
i
PART 1 -GENERAL
F1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
1. New acoustical panels and exposed suspension system (Banquet Hall)
2. Removal and relocation of existing acoustical panels (meeting rooms and meeting room corridors)
3. New acoustical panels to be installed in existing suspension system (meeting room - M107)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling -mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling -mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers; and other
junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 118 inch = 1 foot.
D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated
below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full
range of variations expected.
1. 6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
P. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency that are based on its testing of current
products for compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Single -Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the Work.
C. Single -Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a
single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying the Work.
1. Obtain both acoustical panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
r"
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from
moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 511
LUBBOCK TEXAS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 511-2 `
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture
content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in anyway.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until wet -work
in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,
fire -suppression system components (if any), and partition assemblies (if any). —
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acoutical Ceiling Unit: Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following for each panel type indicated:
1. Manufacturer: Armstrong
a. Product: Minitone, Bold Look II (Banquet Hall)
(1) Description: 24" x 48" x W wet formed mineral fiber panel
(2) Edges: Angled tegular for 15/16" suspension grid.
(3) Color: To be selected by the Architect from Manufacturer's standard finishes.
(4) NRC Range:.55 (ASTM C 423)
(5) Flame Spread: 2.5 (ASTM E 84)
b. Product: (Match existing or approved equal by the Architect)
(1) Description: 24" x 24" x W
(2) Edges: (Match existing)
(3) Color: White _
(4) NRC Range: (Match existing)
(5) Flame Spread: 2.5 (ASTM E 84)
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that
comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light
refiectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Type E-400 (plenum mounting
in which face of test specimen Is 15-3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the test surface) per
ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type
C. Panel Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated on each Acoustical Panel Ceiling Product
Data Sheet at the end of this Section, including those referencing ASTM E 1264 classifications.
2.3 CEILINGS OF NODULAR, CAST, OR MOLDED, MINERAL -BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Panel Characteristics: Type III, Form 1 acoustical panels per ASTM E 1264, with painted finish.
B. Suspension System Type: As described below and specified in Part 2 "Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated,
Direct -Hung Suspension Systems" Article: 2.5, 2.6
C. Suspension System Type: As described below and specified in Part 2 "Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated,
Direct -Hung Suspension Systems" Article: 2.6
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 611
LUBBOCK TEXAS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 511-3
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of
types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635
requirements.
B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners In Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of
hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified
testing agency.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements and job conditions
shown on the Drawings, provide inserts by one of the following:
a. Hilt
b. Ramset
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc -Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table
1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-
(2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide, formed with 0.0396-inch- (1-mm-)
thick galvanized -steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, G 90 (ASTM A 446M, Z 275) Coating
Designation, with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.
F. Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated, or if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension
Fill systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges
of suspension system runners.
�j G. Hold -Down Clips for Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings composed of acoustical
�� 11 panels weighing less than 1 lb per sq. ft. (4.88 kg per sq. m), provide hold-down clips spaced 24 inches
(610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.
2.5 NON -FIRE -RESISTANCE -RATED, DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Wide -Face, Single -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from prepainted
?^ or electrolytic zinc -coated, cold -rolled steel sheet, with prepainted 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide flanges;
other characteristics as follows:
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
2. Finish: Painted color as selected by the Architect to match ceiling panel color.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings
In building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to
reduce transmission of airborne sound.
r-
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
r
l
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 511
LUBBOCK TEXAS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 511-4
a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Company.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. BA-98; Pecora Corp.
b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc. --
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation
and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION Y
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-ln-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation
is specified in other Sections.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and conform to the
layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
C. Remove all damaged existing acoustical panels in the meeting rooms and meeting room corridors which
are stained, chipped or cracked.
D. Carefully remove all existing acoustical panels from meeting room M107. Salvage and protect panels. "-
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
2. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA "Recommendations for _
Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings."
3. U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No. 47-18.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that
are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system
members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or
equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight
turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are .—
secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger
inserts, powder -actuated fasteners.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
B. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 511
LUBBOCK TEXAS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 511-5
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
l
l
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before
they are Installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than
3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 118 inch in 12
feet (3.18 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove
and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and
edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space.
2. For reveal -edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm
6
contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by governing regulations, or for
fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated
or required.
4. Relocate existing undamaged acoustical panels as removed from meeting room M107 to locations
where damaged existing acoustical panels have been removed in meeting rooms and meeting room
r-
corridors.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
2. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces within the scope of work indicated on the Drawings, except where the paint
Schedule indicates that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the
Drawings do not specifically indicate an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare pipes ducts, exposed steel and iron work, and
primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels, unless noted otherwise in the documents.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
b. Elevator entrance doors and frames.
c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Light fixtures.
2. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze and brass.
3. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
4. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code -
required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural
woodwork.
2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames.
3. Division 9 Section "Multicolored Interior Coatings" for spray -applied multicolored coatings.
4. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings.
E. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Alternates" for description of Work in this Section affected
by alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
` 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-
degree meter.
t
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-2
2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
3. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
4. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
5. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for
use. _
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
B. Samples for Verification: Submit sampels of each color, texture and surface gloss for each material
to be applied. Illustrate full range of color, texture and surface gloss to be representative samples
of actual substrate. Define each separate coat including block fillers and primers.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system
from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number. _
8. VOC content.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-3
B. Apply solvent thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied to Owner with
storage and handling instructions. Package paint materials in unopened, factory -sealed containers
for storage and identify with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L) or
1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated
Into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint Schedule.
B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint Schedule by use
of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:
1. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
2. Fuller -O'Brien Paints (Fuller).
3. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden).
4. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).
5. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
6. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & Q.
7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are
compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be
acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or
materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion
of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and
certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be
performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-4
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility
of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates
primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Provide surface applied protection before surface preparation and painting for hardware
and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already
installed that are not to be painted.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that
could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and
mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,
dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners
or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, correct this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturers written instructions.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits,
and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other
recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections
in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, of wood,
including and paneling.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill
scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply
with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface
is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturers written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturers written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the Schedule.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-5
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental
to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place.
Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired
protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment
or furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by
the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure
edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent
to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or
lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
E. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage
with pores filled.
F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-6
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke test procedure at anytime and as often as the Owner deems
necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint
material being used.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint
by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over existing paintedinterior concrete
masonry block units indicated within the scope of work:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over an undercoat.
a. Undercoat: Interior, alkyd- or latex -based, enamel undercoater, as recommended by the
manufacturer fo this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer
to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) Devoe: 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
3) Glidden: UH 400 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Interior Enamel Undercoater.
4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody 9217.
5) PPG: 6-855 Speedhide Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater.
6) P & L: S/D 1012 Suprime "12" Interior Alkyd Wall Primer.
7) S-W: Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel A-40 Series.
b. Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5
mils (0.038 mm).
1) Devoe: 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel
2) Fuller: 206-XX Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
3) Glidden: UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
4) Moore: Satin Impervo #235.
5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi -Gloss Oil.
6) P & L: S/D 5700 Series Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
7) S-W: Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel A-40 Series.
B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior existing and new gypsum board
surfaces:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex -based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer -Sealer.
r"'
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-7
2)
Fuller:
220-20 Pro -Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer.
3)
Glidden:
5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer -Sealer.
4)
Moore:
Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216.
5)
PPG:
17-10 Quick -Drying Interior Latex Primer -Sealer.
6)
P & L:
Z/F 1004 Suprime "4" Interior Latex Wall Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic -latex -based, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended
by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5
mils (0.064 mm).
1)
Devoe:
36XX Wonder -Tones Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint.
2)
Fuller:
202-XX Acrylic Latex Wall Paint.
3)
Glidden:
4000 Series Spred Ultra Flat Latex Wall and Trim Paint.
4)
Moore:
Regal Wall Satin #215.
5)
PPG:
80 Line Wallhide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint.
6)
P & L:
Z/F 2000 Series Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish.
2. Low -Luster, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex -based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1)
Devoe:
50801 Wonder -Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer -Sealer.
2)
Fuller:
220-20 Pro -Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer.
3)
Glidden:
5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer -Sealer.
4)
Moore:
Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216.
5)
PPG:
17-10 Quick -Drying Interior Latex Primer -Sealer.
6)
P & L:
Z/F 1004 Suprime "4" Interior Latex Wall Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied
at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of
not
less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm).
1)
Devoe:
34XX Wonder -Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel.
2)
Fuller:
212-XX AA Enamel Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel.
3)
Glidden:
4100 Series Spred Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall & Trim Paint.
4)
Moore:
Moore's Regal AquaVelvet #319.
5)
PPG:
89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Enamel.
6)
P & L:
Z/F 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet.
t I
C. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over existing, interior plaster surfaces:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Alkali -resistant, acrylic -latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended
by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
1) Devoe: 51701 Wonder -Prime Interior All -Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor
Barrier.
2) Fuller: 220-02 Interior Latex Enamel Undercoat.
t
3) Glidden: 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer -Sealer.
4) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216.
5) PPG: 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer.
6) P & L: Z/F 1001 Suprime "1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi -Purpose Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic -latex, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5
mils (0.064 mm).
i
t
1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint.
2) Fuller: 202-XX Acrylic Latex Wall Paint.
3) Glidden: 4000 Series Spred Ultra Flat Latex Wall and Trim Paint.
4) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215.
5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint.
6) P & L: Z/F 2000 Series Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish.
2. Low -Luster, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Alkali -resistant, alkyd- or latex -based, interior primer, as recommended by the
manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-8
to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) Devoe: 51701 Wonder -Prime Interior All -Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor
Barrier.
2) Fuller: 220-06 Interior Alkyd Wall Primer Sealer.
3) Glidden: 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer -Sealer.
4) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216.
5) PPG: 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer.
6) P & L: Z/F 1001 Suprime "1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi -Purpose Primer. —
b. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied
at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of
not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm).
1) Devoe: 34XX Wonder -Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel. —
2) Fuller: 212-XX AA Enamel Interior Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel.
3) Glidden: 4100 Series Spred Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall & Trim Paint.
4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet #319.
5) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Enamel,
6) P & L: Z/F 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet.
D. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over existing and new interior
wood surfaces:
1. Low -Luster, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Alkyd- or acrylic -latex -based, interior wood primer, as recommended by the
manufacturerfor this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer
to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
1) Devoe: 51701 Wonder -Prime All -Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier,
2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
3) Glidden: 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer -Sealer.
4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
5) PPG: 17-225 Quick -Drying Enamel Undercoater. —
6) P & L: Z/F 1001 Suprime "1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi -Purpose Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied
at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of _
not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm).
1) Devoe: 34XX Wonder -Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel.
2) Fuller: 212-XX AA Enamel Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel.
3) Glidden: 4100 Series Spred Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall & Trim Paint.
4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet #319.
5) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Enamel.
6) P & L: Z/F 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet. —
2. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic -latex -based, interior wood undercoater, as recommended by
the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) Devoe: 51701 Wonder -Prime All -Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier.
2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
3) Glidden: UH 400 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Interior Enamel Undercoater. —
4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
5) PPG: 6-755 Speedhide Interior Water -Based Undercoater.
6) P & L: Z/F 1001 Suprime "1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi -Purpose Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6
mils (0.066 mm).
1) Devoe: 39XX Wonder -Tones Semi -Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. --
2) Fuller: 214-XX AA Enamel Interior Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel
3) Glidden: 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel.
4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl -Acrylic Latex Enamel #333.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-9
5) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex.
6) P & L: Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi -Gloss.
E. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss,
Alkyd -Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer.
a. Primer: Quick -drying, rust -inhibitive, alkyd -based or epoxy -metal primer, as recommended
by
the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer
1)
to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer.
2)
Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
3)
Glidden: 5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, White.
4)
Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint #163.
5)
PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
6)
P & L: S 4551 Tech -Gard High Performance Rust Inhibitor Primer.
7)
S-W: Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd -enamel finish coat,
as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2
mils (0.031 mm).
1)
Devoe: 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
2)
Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
�•.
3)
Glidden: UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
1
4)
Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
5)
PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick -Drying Enamel Undercoater.
6)
P & L: S/D 1011 Suprime 011" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer.
7)
S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel B34W200.
c. Finish
Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4
mils (0.036 mm).
1)
Devoe: 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
2)
Fuller: 110-XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
3)
Glidden: UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
r
4)
Moore: Satin Impervo #235.
`
5)
PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi -Gloss Oil.
6)
P & L: S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
7)
S-W: Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel A-40 Series.
8)
P & L: Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi -Gloss.
`
2. Semigloss,
Alkyd -Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an undercoat and a primer.
r
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
j
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0,031 mm).
1)
Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
2)
Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer.
3)
Glidden: 5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, White.
4)
Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.
5)
PPG: 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial
6)
Enamel.
P & L: Z/F 1003 Suprime "3' Interior/Exterior Latex Metal Primer.
7)
S-W: Galvite Paint B50W3.
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd -enamel finish coat,
as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2
mils (0.031 mm).
1)
Devoe: 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
I`
2)
Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
3)
Glidden: UH 8400 Series Spred Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
4)
Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 920
LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTERIOR PAINTING 09 920-10
5)
PPG:
6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick -Drying Enamel Undercoater.
6)
P & L:
S/D 1011 Suprime "11" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer.
7)
S-W:
ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel B34W200.
c. Finish
Coat:
Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended
by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4
mils (0.036 mm).
1)
Devoe:
26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
2)
Fuller:
110-XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
3)
Glidden:
UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel.
4)
Moore:
Satin Impervo #235.
5)
PPG:
27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi -Gloss Oil.
6)
P & L:
S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
7)
S-W:
Classic 99 Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel A-40 Series.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 921
LUBBOCK, TEXAS MULTI -COLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09 921-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Surface preparation.
2. Applying multicolored coatings over existing vinyl wallcovering on operable partitions.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of primer and coating specified.
1. Include technical information, basic materials analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and
application.
2. List each coating material and cross-reference the specific coating application. Identify each material
by manufacturers catalog number and general classification.
3. Certification by the elastomeric coating system manufacturer that the products supplied comply with
local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
C. Submit samples for initial color selection by the Architect from manufacturer's listing of pre -formulated
colors.
D. Maintenance data for multicolored interior coating to include in "Operating and Maintenance Manual"
specified in Division 1.
1. Methods for maintaining coating.
2. Precautions for using cleaning materials and methods that could be! detrimental to the finish and
performance.
E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of multicolored
coatings with the requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing within the last 3 years of the
current product formulations.
F. Material certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by the Architect, signed by the
L manufacturer certifying that multicolored coatings comply with the requirements specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed multicolored coating
system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for the Project that have resulted in a
construction record of successful in-service performance.
1. Applicator shall certify in writing that technicians utilized for work in this Section have been trained by
the manufacturer. Applicator shall include in certification that specialized equipment as required by
the manufacturer will be used for work in this section.
B. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat material produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using coating systems specified.
C. Fire -Performance Characteristics: Provide coatings with the following surface -burning characteristics as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify coatings with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
I
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 921
LUBBOCK, TEXAS MULTI -COLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09 921-2
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
D. Field Samples: The Architect will select one room or wall surface for each substrate to represent surfaces
and conditions. Apply multicolored coatings to each surface according to the schedule, or as specified.
Provide full -coat samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface until the required color and texture are
obtained. Simulate finished lighting conditions to review the field samples.
1. After finishes are accepted, these surfaces will be used to evaluate the coating system. Final
acceptance of colors will be from job -applied samples.
1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver multicolored coating materials to the Project site in the manufacturer's new, original, unopened
packages or containers bearing the manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Manufacturer's name, stock number, and date of manufacture.
3. Contents by volume.
4. Thinning instructions, if permitted.
5. Application instructions.
6. Color name and number.
7. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly closed, covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature
of 45 deg F (7 deg C) in a well -ventilated area. Keep containers used in storage in a clean condition, free
of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect coating materials from freezing. Keep the storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags
and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions in spaces to receive
multicolored coatings that comply with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide adequate natural
or induced ventilation, as necessary, for curing and as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Temperature Conditions: Apply multicolored coatings only when the temperature of the surface to be
coated, the ambient temperature, and the temperature of the materials to be used are above 50 deg F
(10 deg C).
C. Weather Conditions: Do not apply coatings when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at
. temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnished from same production run as materials applied. Package materials with a
protective covering and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Multi -Color Interior Coating: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of amount applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering multicolored
coating materials that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide multicolored coatings manufactured
by one of the following:
1. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).
2. Polomyx Industries. (Polomyx).
3. Zolatone Process, Inc. (Zolatone).
r
r
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 921
LUBBOCK TEXAS MULTI -COLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09 921-3
2.2 MULTICOLORED COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are
compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide the best -quality grade of multicolored coatings. Materials not displaying
manufacturer's identification as a best -grade product will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Using manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials
is not intended to Imply that products of named manufacturers are required to be used to the exclusion
of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and
certificate of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of pre -
formulated colors for multicolored coating systems.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory -formulated, latex -type primers that are
compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
2.4 MULTICOLORED COATING MATERIALS
A. Multicolored Coatings: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory -formulated, multicolored
coating materials that are compatible with the substrate and prime coat materials indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Multicolored Coatings:
a. Coronado
b. Polomyx:
c. Zolatone:
3.1 EXAMINATION
Toll-O-Fect Multicolor Wallcoating.
Polomyx Multi -color Finish.
Zolatone System 43.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine substrates to receive multicolored coatings and conditions under which the coatings will be
applied to conform to the manufacturer's application requirements. Do not begin coating application until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Start of coating application will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If such items cannot be removed,
provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and coating. After coating operations have
been completed in each space or area, reinstall the items removed using workers skilled in the trades
involved.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to the manufacturer's
instructions for each particular substrate condition, and as specified.
1. Cleaning: Clean surfaces to receive multicolored coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning.
Schedule cleaning so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning operations do not fall on
wet, newly coated surfaces.
2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove the primer and reprime. Notify the
Architect in writing about anticipated problems if the multicolored coating system is applied over
substrates primed by others.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 921
LUBBOCK TEXAS MULTI -COLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09 921-4
3. Existing Vinyl Surfaces: Prepare existing vinyl surfaces before beginning multicolored coating —
application. Remove loose vinyl and other contaminants. Clean chalking and dusting surfaces that
interfere with coating adhesion. Repair holes or cracks with an appropriate patching compound and
spot prime. Sand surfaces smooth.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply multicolored coatings according to the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for the substrates and material being applied.
B. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other conditions
detrimental to the formation of a coating.
C. Prime Coats: Before applying multicolored coatings, apply a prime coat as recommended by the
manufacturer to substrates required to be coated that have not received a prime coat by others. Reprime
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas appear.
D. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded coating
materials from the site.
B. Remove multicolored coatings from adjacent surfaces not intended to be coated.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not, against damage caused by multicolored
coatings.
B. Provide temporary closure to confine spraying operation and to prevent polluting surrounding environment.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated surfaces. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations.
END OF SECTION
7
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 680
LUBBOCK TEXAS CARPET 09 680-1
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and
Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this section.
12 SUMMARY
A. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work as
specified herein and required by job conditions.
B. The work shall include, but is not limited to the following:
1. Selective Demolition of existing carpet, carpet and resilient wall base, and related accessories.
2. Patching and Repairs; Slab preparation and leveling.
` 3. Coordination with expansion joints.
4. Furnishing and installating new tufted carpet, resilient wall base and related accessories.
5. Installing Owner Iumished Axminster carpet and carpet wall base.
6. Extent of work as per the Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source of Materials (Applies to tufted carpet only):
1. Carpet Materials: To ensure matching of quality, color, pattern, and texture, install materials produced
., from same dye lot and productions run. Where materials cannot be obtained from a single lot or
production run, notify the Architect so that the extent and use of each lot or run can be controlled.
2. Carpet Material, Installation Materials and Accessories: Provide material obtained from one source
for each type of material used in the Work. Do not change source or brands of materials during
progress of Work.
` B. Field Constructed Mock -Up (Applies to Axminster carpet only): Before start of carpet work, erect fully
finished mockups (including borders and carpet base) for Architect's review and approval. Install
mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials and methods indicated for final unit
of work.
1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and size indicated on the Drawings or, If not indicated, as directed
by Architect.
2. Locate the following mock ups on site in location as directed by Architect.
a. Slab Preparation Mock -Up (To review level of floor preparation).
b. Carpet Seaming Mock -Up (To review quality of seaming and pattern matching).
3. Mock -Ups will be reviewed for conformance with allowable tolerances, seam appearance,
workmanship, and aesthetic effects. Replace unsatisfactory mockups.
4. Notify Architect of date of job mock-ups installation commencement and completion.
5. Architect will review completed job mock-up installations after at least one week from time of
notification of job mock-up completion.
6. Obtain acceptance of job mock-ups prior to commencement of carpet installation.
7. Mock-ups will be maintained throughout the installation of the carpeting to be used to compare actual
installation with proposed results and shall remain as part of the work.
C. Testing:
1. The Axminster carpet shall be randomly tested throughout the delivery and installation phases of the
work:
a. The carpet construction specifications prescribed in the contract documents by an independent
carpet testing laboratory selected by the Architect and paid by the owner in accordance with the
general conditions. The Contractor shall notify the Architect when the carpet has been suitably
stored at the site. The Contractor shall remove a test sample from the carpet as selected by the
Architect, and shall deliver it to the Architect. This test sample shall be one piece of carpeting
measuring twelve feet by twelve feet.
D. Pre -Installation Job Meeting: Conduct Pre -Installation Job Meeting with the Owner, Owner's
F representatives, and the carpet manufacturer.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 680
LUBBOCK TEXAS CARPET 09 680-2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section Cross -Reference: General Conditions of the contract for submittal requirements.
B. Manufacturers Data: Submit the following for each carpet type, accessory item, and installation material
required:
1. Carpet Construction Specifications.
2. Carpet Manufacturers delivery, storage, handling, and installation instructions.
3. Carpet adhesive safety data sheets and application instructions.
4. Carpet Manufacturers warranty where required.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit the following:
1. Dimensioned Drawings: Show carpet layout. Verify field conditions and include field measurements.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for lay of carpet. Clearly indicate the following:
a. Extent of existing materials to be removed.
b. Extent of existing materials to remain.
c. Carpet material type, color, dye lot, and backing material.
d. Pattern type, repeat size, location of repeats, direction and starting point.
e. Balance of Pattern within a space, zone, inset and as indicated in the Drawings.
f. Type, color and location of carpet insets.
g. Direction and lay of pile.
h. Installation method for each space, location or carpet type.
i. Location of Building Expansion Joints
j. Areas of adhesive use, and grid layout for adhesive application.
k. Type and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips
I. Details and Locations of Transitions to other flooring materials.
m. Type and color of wall base.
n. Seam locations types and methods.
2. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls/partitions, and locations where cutouts are required in
carpet Work.
3. Show installation details at any special conditions including at building expansion joints.
D. Samples (Applies to Tufted Carpet):
1. Development Samples: Multiple rounds of custom color samples, total number as determined by the
Architect, will be required from the manufacturer in order to develop the final carpet yam colors for
the CARPET TYPE - TUFTED.
a. Development samples shall include a minimum of three variation samples of each color type,
produced together for each "multiple round" sample submission.
b. All Samples to be submitted to the Architect within seven (7) calendar days upon receipt of
request, instructions and drawings by the Architect.
c. Size of the Development Samples to be as determined by the Architect.
2. Accessories: Provide material samples of each type for color and finish selection by Architect:
Resilient Wall Base and Stair Trim, Transition Strips, Carpet Edge Guards and Stair Nosings, and any
other accessory item to be included in the work.
E. Product Identification (Applies to Tufted Carpet): In addition to manufacturers standard product
identification, for each roll of carpet produced, the manufacturer is responsible for measuring the pattern
repeat at both the left and right selvage twenty feet from the roll end. The pattern repeat measurements
are to be labeled on the outside of each roll prior to shipping. Carpet manufacturer to code all rolls for
pattern match sequence within plus or minus 2 inches over 90 feet.
F. Pre -Installation Job Meeting Report: Submit pre -installation job meeting report.
G. Maintenance Manual (Applies to Tufted Carpet): Submit four (4) copies of manufacturers instructions for
daily and periodic maintenance of the Carpet Work. Include cleaning and stain removal products and
procedures recommended. Include precautions against products and methods which may be detrimental
to appearance and performance. Include instructions for repairing materials.
H. Maintenance Training (Applies to Tufted Carpet): Prior to Final Inspection, review maintenance manual
with Owners maintenance staff, and demonstrate on site recommended methods for cleaning and
maintaining the Work.
F
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 680
LUBBOCK TEXAS CARPET 09 680-3
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty, executed by the Carpet Materials
Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace carpet which fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the
Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) year warranty period begins from the Date of the Final Certificate of the
Architect.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Maintenance/Replacement Materials: Before beginning carpet installation, deliver stock of replacement
materials to Using Agency's designated storage space. Furnish full size units, matching installed
materials, packaged and marked for identification as extra run material.
1. Deliver not less than 5% of the total square yardage, as manufactured for installation, of each type
of carpet in full rolls. Maintenance materials are exclusive of material required to properly complete
installation.
a. Fumish maintenance materials from same production run as materials installed.
2. Furnish 5% of each type of accessory components required.
3. Package replacement materials with protective covering recommended by manufacturer, and
identified with appropriate labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURER
A. General:
1. All specification criteria included on Carpet Data Sheet refers to finished product after all
manufacturing is complete.
2. Manufacturers listed below are Acceptable Manufacturers; (Refer to the Special Conditions for
substitution request instructions).
2.2 CARPET DATA SHEET
A. Product Description:
1. CARPET TYPE - AXMINSTER: C-1, C-2, C-3, C-4, C-5 and C-6
a. Manufacturer: (Axminster Carpet material furnished 'by Owner; Receiving, inspection,
handling, storage and Installation by Contractor)
b. Pattern Repeat: Refer to Carpet Schedule for repeat size of each carpet type.
c. Pile Type: Cut Pile
d. Yam Description:
(1) Fiber Content: 80% Wool / 20%; Nylon; Wool to be natural virgin commercial grade wool
fiber, thoroughly scoured, treated for permanent resistance to insect damage; Nylon to be
manufacturer's standard advanced generation nylon with permanent static control.
(2) Ply: 2 ply
(3) Size:47
(4) Twist: 5 TPI Single 4 TPI Folded (minimum)
e. Dye Method: Yam Dyed
f. Pitch Per Inch: 7
g. Rows/Wires Per Inch: 9
h. Bowing Tolerance: 1/4" maximum in V-0", 3/4" maximum in 12'-0" width
I. Skewing Tolerance: 1- 1/2" maximum in 12'-0" width, non -cumulative
J. Pile Height: 0.250 inches
k. Total Yam Pile Weight: 36.19 ounce minimum/square yard
I. Total Weight: 62.0 ounce minimum/square yard
m. Backing Components:
(1) Chain: Polypropylene
(2) Stuffer: Polypropylene
(3) Weft: Polypropylene
(4) Backcoating: Bounces per yard SBR latex, minimum, with integral antistatic treatment.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 680
LUBBOCK TEXAS CARPET 09 680-4
B. Product Description:
1. CARPET TYPE - TUFTED: C-7
a. Manufacturer: Monterey
b. Product Name: 6017 Chequers
(1) Custom Color: As determined by the Architect
(2) Fiber Content: DuPont Antron Legacy Continuous Filament Nylon
(3) Pile Weight: 32 ounces per square yard
(4) Construction: Patterned Loop Pile
(5) Pattern Repeat: width 13/16 inches x 1/2 inch long
(6) Dye Method: Skein Dyed
(7) Machine Gauge: 1/10
(8) Stitches per Inch: 11
(9) Pile Height:.187 inches
(10) Density:6.160
(11) Primary Backing: Woven Polypropylene
(12) Secondary Backing: Super-Lok System
(13) Flammability Rating: Passes Methenamine Pill Test (DOC-FF-1-70); Rated Class 1 on
Flooring Radiant Panel Test (ASTM Method E-648 Glue Down)
(14) Smoke Density: Rating less than 450 on NBS Smoke Density Test (ASTM Method E662-79)
(15) Width: 12 feet
(16) Static Rating: Static Propensity is below 3.5 KV
(17) Warranty: 10 year limited warranty
2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Harbinger Industries
b. Masland Contract
c. Shaw Industries
C. Installation Method: Direct Glue.
2.3 CARPET SCHEDULE
Carpet
Type
Name
No. of
Colors
**Repeat Size
C-1
Pedestrian Mail / Meeting Room Insert
15
V-0" W x 3%9" L
C-2
Solid Border Carpet
1
NONE
C-3
Banquet Hall Insert - A
15
6'-0" W x 3%9" L
C-4
*Banquet Hall Insert - B
15
12'-0" W x 3"-9" L
C-5
*Banquet Hall Insert - C
15
12-0" W x 3%9" L
C-6
6 inch - Carpet Wall Base
1
NONE
C-7
Administration Offices
NOTES:
Where 15 custom colors are indicated, 3 colors will be "planted"
Installation at Banquet Hall: Carpets C-3, C-4 & C-5 are required to "pattern match" at carpet transition
locations as indicated on the drawings.
* Carpet C-4 and C-5 are the same design and colors, but C-5 is a MIRROR IMAGE of C-4.
** Width of repeat runs same direction as carpet roll width (12'-0").
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Carpet Adhesive and Seam Sealer: Premium line, water-resistant, mildew -resistant, non -staining,
stabilized multi -purpose adhesive and seam sealer. Provide adhesive and seam sealer by same
manufacturer.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:
a. Manufacturer: Advanced Adhesive Technology, Inc.
(1) Adhesive Product: Premium Adhesive 260/280 Series.
(2) Sealer Product: Solvent Seam Sealer #125
(3) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect .
I i ,
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 680
r LUBBOCK TEXAS CARNET " - 09 680-5
l b. Manufacturer: Durabond Division, USG Industries, Inc.
(1) Adhesive Product: Premium Adhesive D-600.
(2) Sealer Product: Solvent Seam Sealer D-15.
i (3) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
c. Manufacturer: Para -Chem Southern
r• (1) Adhesive Product: Premium Adhesive 11M-433/233 Series.
(2) Sealer Product: Solvent Seam Sealer #4-263
(3) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
d. Manufacturer: W.F. Taylor Company
(1) Adhesive Product: Premium Multi -Purpose Adhesive 12080.
(2) Sealer Product: Touchdown #775 Carpet Seam Cement.
(3) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
B. Seaming Tape: Premium line hot -melt seaming tape recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping
seams. Silicone -backed seaming tape is not acceptable.
1. Width: Provide min. 6" wide seam tape.
pr C. Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
1.
D. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, and selected by Installer to meet
PM project circumstances and requirements.
-
E. Resilient Wall Base: 6 inch high rubber wall base, profile: straight, 1/8 inch thickness - heavy gauge, in
lengths of 120 feet, matching trim for stair stringer, color as selected by the Architect, per locations as
indicated on the Drawings. (The base shall conform fully to the requirements of U.S. Federal
Specifications SS-W-40a, Type I Rubber and have Class B rating in ASTM E-84 "Tunnel Test" with a
smoke density of 150 - 200.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:
a. Manufacturer: Roppe Corporation
(1) Product: No -Toe (NT), 6 inch rubber straight base, 1/8 inch thickness
(a) Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturers standard colors.
(2) Adhesive Product: Manufacturer's recommended base adhesive
(3) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
b. Manufacturer: Burke Flooring Products
(1) Product: Carpet -type, 6 inch rubber straight base, 1/8 inch thickness
(a) Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturers standard colors.
(2) Adhesive Product: Manufacturer's recommended base adhesive
(3) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
c. Manufacturer: Johnsonite
(1) Product: Toeless, 6 inch rubber straight base, 1/8 inch thickness
(a) Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturers standard colors.
(2) Adhesive Product: Manufacturer's recommended base adhesive
(3) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
F. Metal Carpet Edge Guards, Stair Nosings and Transition Strips:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product:
a. Gradus Inc.
(1) Finish: Natural oxidized bronze
(2) Insert: Anti -slip PVC, color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturers standard
colors.
(3) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
G. Rigid PVC Carpet Edge Guards, Stair Nosings and Transition Strips:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product:
a. Gradus Inc.
(1) Product: Clip -Top Carpet Trim
r
(2) Product: Hardnose Stair Edging
[ r
(3) Finish: Natural oxidized bronze
1
(4) Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors.
2. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
H. Metal Edging: 1/8" wide metal edging for transition to other flooring materials. Top member as noted
below. Bottom member of zinc coated steel, angle or "T"- type for adhesive bonding to substrate.
Acceptable Manufacturer and Product:
r1.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 680
LUBBOCK TEXAS CARPET 09 680-6
a. Manhattan American Terrazzo Strip Company
(1) Product: Divider/accessory strip.
(2) Top Member: Half hard brass
(3) Finish: Natural oxidized bronze
(4) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examination: Examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpet is to be
installed. Notify Owner in writing of major conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work, or which
will result in nonconforming conditions.
B. Manufacturer's Inspection: Manufacturer's representative shall inspect job -site storage of materials and
condition of substrate prior to installation, and give written inspection report.
C. Commencement of Work: Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected,
manufacturer's recommendations have been executed, and substrate conditions have been approved
by manufacturer. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of substrate and conditions.
32 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Acceptance: Provide written acceptance of substrate with a letter from the Installer that tests noted above
have been performed and all conditions are acceptable.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Conditioning:
1. Materials: Condition carpet materials and adhesive in the area they are to be installed, in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. Where such instructions are not published, obtain conditioning
instructions in writing from the manufacturer.
B. Selective Demolition: Demolish and remove / reinstall existing material only to the extent required by new
work and as indicated.
1. Removal of carpet in existing areas shall not begin until new carpet is ready to be installed.
2. Remove and dispose of existing carpet, accessories and wall base that is to be replaced.
3. Clean substrate to insure that all surfaces are free of adhesives, solvent, dust, wax, grease, paint, oil
or other substances that might cause a non -adherence problem for new carpet adhesives and
patching / leveling materials.
4. Notify Architect and carpet manufacturer's representative that carpet removal has been completed
and surfaces are prepared to receive new carpet.
C. Patching and Repairs: Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent
construction by selective demolition operations.
1. Concrete Substrate Preparation, Leveling and Repair: Sand or remove protrusions, bumps, and
ridges to make floor level. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions, and rough or chipped areas using
patching material recommended by carpet and adhesive manufacturers.
a. Building Expansion Joints: Prepare surface and level substrate up to joint. Use leveling material
compatible with carpet adhesive material. Feather compound to a minimum of 3 feet both sides
of joint.
2. Existing Wood Flooring Preparation: Sand or remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges to make floor
level. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions, and rough or chipped areas using patching material
recommended by carpet and adhesive manufacturers. Prepare surface by removal of any wax,
finishes, oil, grease, paint, dirt, non -compatible adhesives and any other foreign matter. Provide
moisture barrier applied coating over existing floor surface as recommended by the Carpet
Manufacturer.
3. Preparation: Clear away debris from surfaces to receive carpet. Clean substrate per manufacturer's
instructions. Substrate shall be firm, dry, clean, and free from oil, grease, paint, dirt, non -compatible
adhesives, and other foreign matter. Vacuum clean substrate immediately before installation. Check
concrete surfaces to ensure no dusting through installed carpet materials.
1
!' LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 680
r LUBBOCK TEXAS URPET _ 09 680-7
{ a. Sealer: Apply sealer to prevent dusting 9 previous finish has been chemically stripped, or if
surface is powdery or porous. Sealer shall be compatible with adhesive and patching / leveling
materials.
D. Furniture and Equipment: Carpet Installer will not be responsible for the moving of existing furniture or
equipment or Us replacement.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturers recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet. Follow
approved shop drawings.
1. Installation Pattern: Install carpet in accordance with approved seaming diagrams and the Contract
Documents, with pile inclination in one direction.
2. Seams: Install carpet with a minimum number of cross or edge seams. Prepare seams by trimming
off the mill or factory edge per manufacturer's instructions. Center seams under door or operable
partitions in closed position. Do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic
through door.
3. Coordination: Notify Architect if additional seams are required other than those indicated on seaming
diagrams, if seam locations must be adjusted to coordinate with job site conditions or manufacturer's
instructions, or if job site conditions differ from those shown on the approved shop drawings.
4. Carpet Pattern Matching: Align pattern repeats and match patterns as indicated on Construction
Documents.
a. Pattern Matching: Align pattern repeats and match patterns between breadths of carpet and
across seams. Align and balance the pattern in each space. Follow manufacturer's instructions
for installation procedures to achieve match patterns and to adjust pattern repeat skewing or
bowing.
5. Inserts and Borders: Install carpet inserts and borders as indicated, maintaining carpet direction and
lay of pile. Balance pattern within bounds of insert and match pattern along adjacent inserts within
a space.
6. Coverage and Terminations: Extend carpet under open -bottomed obstructions and under removable
flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves of space. Cover all floor type door closers.
7. Cut -Outs: Provide cut-outs where required. Conceal edges with protective edge guards or
overlapping flanges.
8. Edge Guards and Trim Strips: Install edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed. Install trim strips
where carpet is flush with adjacent flooring material. Install transition strips where carpet is not flush
with adjacent flooring material. Anchor strips to substrate per manufacturer's instructions.
9. Expansion Joints: Bridge building expansion joints with "unadhered" carpet. Do not adhere the carpet
to the substrate within 18 inches of building expansion joints. Seams occurring within 5 feet of an
expansion joint and running parallel with that expansion joint are to receive hot -melt tape.
10. Cutting: Where cut carpet is required, cut in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using tools
designed for the materials being installed.
11. Squareness and Tightness: Install carpet, to fit squarely, with smooth, even seams, and without gaps
or between seam and adjacent materials. Avoid compressing (jamming) or distorting seams.
12. Sequencing: Follow manufacturer's instructions for carpet sequencing and pattern matching.
13. Seam Rolling: Use seam roller or similar instrument recommended by the manufacturer to blend and
enhance the seams.
B. Direct -Glue Installation:
1.
Fitting: Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive.
2.
Edges: Trim edges, and seal cut edges with seam sealer per manufacturer's instructions.
3.
Carpet Installation: Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Adhere carpet to floor with 100 percent contact with adhesive. Butt carpet edges tightly
together to form seams without gaps. Roll entire carpet area lightly to eliminate air pockets and insure
uniform bond.
4.
Hot Melt Seams: Form hot -melt tape seams, where indicated on drawings, to provide sufficient
strength for stretching of not less than 100 lbs. Use temperature recommended by manufacturer to
completely fuse the seaming tape adhesive to the carpet backing. Seaming procedure shall not
damage the face of the carpet. Discolored carpet fibers at seam locations are not acceptable.
C. Stair Installation: Install by direct glue down method. Conceal edges.
1.
Closed Riser Stairs: Locate seams at inside comers between treads and risers.
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 680
LUBBOCK TEXAS CARPET 09 680-8
2. Open Riser Stairs: Fully adhere carpet to all sides of treads; locate seams on back vertical face of
tread. Install with adhesives recommended by manufacturer for this installation.
D. Carpet Base Installation:
1. Install carpet base with adhesives as recommended by manufacturer. Vertical seams should not be
visible. Carpet base pile must always run in a consistent direction. Obtain approval from Architect y
on pile direction and use of lengths less than 12'-0".
3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTION, AND ADJUSTMENT
A. Adhesive Removal: Remove any adhesive promptly from face of carpet by method which will not damage
face or affect color, fiber, or bonding adhesive.
B. Cleaning and Repair: Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with two -motor
commercial machine with face -beater element. Remove spots, dirt, or soil using method recommended
by manufacturer which will not affect color, pattern, or fiber. Replace carpet material where spots or
soiling cannot be removed. When replacing carpet, replace in their original position and pile direction.
C. Ventilation: Arrange for adequate post -installation ventilation of carpet areas.
D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer, to ensure that carpet deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.
E. Usable scraps: In addition to Maintenance Materials salvage all usable scraps for Owner's use. Label
and package material and deliver to Using Agency's designated storage space. Usable scraps are
defined to include roll ends of less than 4'-0" length and pieces of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more than
8" wide.
F. Finished Installation: Leave the finished installation free of any defects or damage.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 960
{" LUBBOCK, TEXAS ' FABRId WALLCOVERING _ 09 960-1
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The Work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Removal of existing wallcovering.
2. Preparation of substrate.
3. Installation of new wallcovering.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. American Society for Testing and Mate ria ls(ASTM):
E 84-91a Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
701-89 Methods of Fire Tests for Flame -Resistant Textiles and Films.
3. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists(AATCC).
16-1990 Colorfastness to Light.
! B. Source of Materials:
1. Wallcovering Materials: Provide each type of wallcovering produced by a single manufacturer and
from a single dye lot and production run, for each color and pattern of wallcovering specified, to
ensure matching of quality, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Adhesives and Installation Materials: Provide adhesives and installation materials, including
recommended primer/sealers, recommended by the wallcovering materials manufacturer, for each
type of wallcovering installed. Do not change source or brands of materials during progress of work.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm specializing in commercial quality wal'Icovering, with not less than 5
years of production experience, whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of
wallcoverings with requirements indicated.
D. Fabric Finisher Qualifications: Firm specializing in application of backings and finishes to commercial
quality fabric wallcovering, with not less than 5 years of production experience, whose published product
literature clearly indicates compliance of wallcoverings with requirements indicated.
1. Testing Facilities: Provide fabric finishing house with ability to test and certify physical characteristics
and fire performance characteristics.
E. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in the commercial installation of wallcoverings, with not less than
5 years of experience in wallcovering materials and installation methods similar to that required for this
project.
F. Test Panels: Prior to start of wallcovering work, install 4 full width test panels of each type, color, and
pattern of wallcovering, including one corner, fully finished, for Architect's review and approval.
1. Location: Locate test panels on site, in location indicated on the drawings, or if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
r 2. Lighting Conditions: Illuminate test panel installation areas using the building's permanent lighting
system.
3. Test panels will be reviewed for color, texture, pattern and pattern match, workmanship, finish, and
seam quality only.
C 4. Replace test panels which are not acceptable until a satisfactory installation is achieved.
5. Retain and maintain approved test panels during installation in undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging completed unit of work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 01, Submittals section for submittal requirements.
I'
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 960
LUBBOCK TEXAS FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09 960-2
B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's product data for each type of wallcovering material specified.
Include technical information, installation instructions for each type of material and substrate, and
maintenance instructions.
1. Physical Properties: Include data on physical characteristics, including durability and fade resistance,
and flame resistance characteristics.
2. Substrate Conditions: Include manufacturer's recommendations for maximum permissible moisture
content of substrates.
3. Fabric Materials for Use as Wallcovering: Include manufacturer's product data for fabric materials
as produced, and physial characteristics and fire prevention characteristics of materials after
preparation as wallcovering.
4. Applied Backings: Submit product data on backing types and applications specified.
5. Applied Finishes: Submit product data on applied finish treatments specified.
6. Adhesives: Submit letter verifying manufacturer's certification that their recommended adhesive will
permit removal of wallcovering materials specified from substrates indicated without damage to
substrates.
C. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing location and extent of each wallcovering type specified, including
indication of termination points. Include field dimensions. Show installation detailing and elevations at
nonstandard conditions.
1. Indicate doorways, built-in cabinets, and other locations where breaks will be required in wallcovering.
D. Initial Selection Samples: Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's standard
samples no less than 8 by 10 inches showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each
wallcovering type specified.
1. Seam samples: 18" X 18" minimum size samples for each type, color, pattern and texture of fabric
wallcovering, mounted on actual substrate, with center seam, to illustrate seam quality.
E. Certification: Submit manufacturer's/fabric finisher's certificate stating that wallcovering materials
furnished comply with specified requirements for fire performance characteristics and physical properties
indicated.
1. Test Reports: Submit certified laboratory test data and reports evidencing material compliance with _
requirements indicated.
F. Statement of Application: Submit Statement of Application, signed by Contractor and Installer, stating that
wallcovering preparation and installation complies with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and
written recommendations, for each wallcovering and substrate condition required. Indicate each
wallcovering product and substrate.
G. Pre -Installation Job Meeting Report: Submit pre -installation job meeting report. Refer to Division 01,
Project Meetings, for requirements.
H. Maintenance Data: Submit two (2) copies of manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of each
type of wallcovering. Include methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition
under anticipated use conditions, and instructions for repair of the Work. Include cleaning and stain
removal products and procedures recommended. Include precautions against products and methods
which may be detrimental to appearance and performance or might damage wallcovering material.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard product warranty information for wallcovering
products indicated. Include the following:
1. Warranty against manufacturing defects and defective workmanship.
2. Warranty Period: Warranty period is 2 years after the date of substantial completion.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Maintenance Materials: After completion of work, deliver the following to the project site:
1. Standard Pre -Backed Fabric Wallcovering Products: Not less than 6 lineal yards of each
manufacturer's standard wallcovering type, and of each color and pattern installed.
2. Maintenance materials are exclusive of material required to properly complete the installation.
a. Furnish maintenance materials from same dye lot and production run as materials installed.
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 960
LUBBOCK, TEXAS FABRIG*dLLCOVERING 09 960-3
z
r
3. Packaging: Package maintenance materials with protective covering or wrapping recommended by
manufacturer, and identified with appropriate labels as maintenance material.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRIC WALLCOVERING
A. Pre -Backed Fabric Wallcovering Materials: Provide fabric wallcovering indicated, affixed to manufacturer's
standard backing of the type specified. Provide materials which has been treated with manufacturer's
standard stain -resistant and mildew -resistant treatments, and other finish treatments as indicated.
1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide fabric wallcovering materials tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84, to meet Class "A" requirements.
a. Flame Spread: Not more than 25.
b. Smoke Developed: Not more than 50.
r„ 2. Color, Pattern, and Texture: Provide materials in colors, patterns, textures, and finishes as specified
and to match Architect's sample(s).
3. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Wallcovering Type 1.
a. Manufacturer: JM Lynne
(1) Product: Textured Acoustical Wall Fabric
(a) Pattern: Silence FIR
(b) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
(c) Fiber Content: 100% Polyester
r (d) Weight: Total weight 24 ounces per linear yd. minimum.
(e) Acoustical Rating: ANSI-ASTM C423 N.R.C.70
(f) Backing Material: Acrylic backing.
(g) Width: 54 inches.
(2) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with Architect.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
r" A. Adhesives: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive produced expressly for use with wallcovering
indicated, to suit application and substrate conditions. Provide materials which are mildew -resistant and
nonstaining to wallcovering. Provide adhesive materials permitting removal of wallcovering from surfaces
r without damage to substrate.
I 1. Adhesives to be used should be of the heavy duty type, with low/water content, which dry clear or
translucent.
B. Primer/Sealer: Provide manufacturer's recommended primer/sealer product for sealing and preparing
substrates to receive wallcovering, and suitable for wallcovering and application indicated.
1. Gypsum Drywall Release Coat: Provide sealer or undercoat for new gypsum drywall substrates as
recommended by wallcovering manufacturer for sealing and preparing gypsum drywall substrates to
receive wallcovering, and suitable for wallcovering and application indicated. Provide product which
will permit subsequent removal of wallcovering without damage to paper facing.
2. Previously Painted Surfaces: Provide undercoat/sealer for previously painted gypsum drywall and
other substrates as recommended by wallcovering manufacturer. Undercoat product to prevent
pigment bleed -through in wallcovering materials to be installed on previously painted surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
�» A. Examination: Examine substrates and conditions under which wallcovering materials are to be installed.
Notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
1 1. Substrate Conditions: Verify that substrates to receive wallcovering work are free from cracks, holes,
ridges, crayon markings, ball or felt tip pen markings, lipstick markings, or other defects and
imperfections that could be visible or perceptible through the finished surface, or which could impair
performance, appearance, or bonding.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 960
LUBBOCK TEXAS FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09 960-4
a. Gypsum Drywall Substrates: Verify that gypsum drywall substrates have nails and screws _
recessed, with all joints, fastener locations, and depressions taped, spackled, and sanded to be
smooth and level.
b. Concrete Substrates: Verify that block filler has been applied to concrete substrates, and that the
surface is smooth and level.
2. Substrate Tolerances: Verify that substrates are straight within a maximum tolerance of 1 /8" in 1 V-0",
non -cumulative, with a maximum variation of 1/16" in V-0".
B. Commencement of Work: Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of substrate and conditions.
3.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Building Conditions: Maintain constant temperature and humidity levels within limits specified in
manufacturer's written instructions in installation areas for at least 10 days before, during, and at least 10
days after application of materials.
B. Lighting: Illuminate installation areas using the building's permanent lighting system. Temporary lighting
alone will not be acceptable.
C. Ventilation: Provide ventilation of spaces where wallcovering is to be installed, as recommended by
Manufacturer.
3.3 PREPARATION AND CONDITIONING
A. Performance of Preparation Work: Perform all work indicated in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Where manufacturer's instructions for specific conditions differ from that indicated, notify
Architect.
B. Substrate Preparation: Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Surface Fixtures: Remove switchplates, wall plates, and surface -mounted fixtures in areas where
wallcovering is to be applied.
2. Remove existing wallcovering and adhesive material from all surfaces to receive new wallcovering as
indicated in the renovation work.
a. Surface protusions and low spots should be sanded and filled so that the surface is clean, smooth
and dry.
3. Concrete Substrates: Acid -wash concrete and concrete block substrates with product recommended _
by manufacturer.
4. Plaster Substrates: Neutralize plaster substrates.
5. Glossy Substrates: Sand glossy surfaces to a dull finish.
6. Cleaning: Clean substrates to be free of dust, dirt, stains, oily coatings, water -based paint, or other
compounds preventing adhesive bond or impairing performance of installed materials.
a. Mildew: Remove mildew and treat wall surfaces with mildew growth inhibitor recommended by
manufacturer.
7. Moisture Content: Test substrate with electronic moisture meter to verify that surfaces to be covered
do not exceed moisture content permitted by the manufacturer.
8. Stains: Do not install wallcoverings over oil -based wood stains or felt-tip pen markings.
9. Pigment Bleed -Through: Verify that pigment bleed -through will not occur in wallcovering work to be
installed on previously painted surfaces.
C. Prime and Seal: Verify that substrates are thoroughly dry. Prime and seal substrates in accordance with
the wallcovering manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrate and wallcovering material to be
applied.
D. Wallcovering Conditioning: Condition and acclimatize wallcovering materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, by removing them from packaging in the installation area not less than 24
hours before application.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 960
r LUBBOCK, TEXAS FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09 960-5
1A INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Perform all work indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Use manufacturer's recommended adhesives, tools, and other installation materials. Where
manufacturer's instructions for specific conditions and installation methods differ from that indicated, notify
Architect.
B. Material Inspection: Inspect each roll of wallcovering materials for defects, and verify that pattern and
color match approved samples, before cutting. Do not cut defective rolls.
1. Variations in Color or Pattern: Communicate variations in color and/or pattern match to Manufacturer
and Architect. Do not proceed with installation of unmatched materials. Discontinue installation until
materials have been examined by manufacturer's representative and Architect.
C. Attached Work: Install wallcovering before installation of casings, bases, cabinets, counters, and similar
items to be attached to the wall.
D. Installation: Place panels consecutively in the order cut from rolls, including filling spaces above or below
openings. Hang in sequence, with or without reversing strips, as indicated in the manufacturer's
instructions. Inspect each piece before hanging. Do not install sections of material with defects.
1. Primed Substrates: Verify that primed substrates are fully dry prior to installation of wallcovering.
2. Acrylic -Backed Wallcovering: Apply adhesive to the wall, and place wallcovering in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. Avoid getting adhesive on face of wallcovering.
3. Seams: Install seams plumb, and at least 12 inches away from corners. Horizontal seams are not
acceptable.
4. Pattern Matching: Align pattern repeats and match patterns between panels and across seams of
wallcovering materials.
5. Edges: Pre -trim edges so that seams butt tightly and to assure color uniformity and pattern match.
6. Corners: Form corners which are crisp, square, and true, and with wallcovering fully adhered to
substrate.
7. Bonding: Install wallcovering with sound bond of material to substrate.
8. Rolling: Roll or brush wallcovering to assure bond, and remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and
other defects from each panel immediately after installation.
9. Trimming: Trim wallcovering evenly to edges of wall penetrations. Trim seams and other straight cuts
using a straight edge. Perform cutting work on a cutting table when possible. When wall cutting
procedures are required, perform cutting without scoring, perforating, or otherwise damaging the
substrate. Use a fresh blade for each cut.
10. Smoothing: Smooth edges with felt -covered dry seam roller.
11. Replacement: Upon completion of wallcovering installation in each space or area, re -install items,
such as fixtures, plates, and similar items, which had been removed, using workmen skilled in the
trades involved. Verify that cut edges of wallcovering are concealed.
E. Installation Tolerances:
1. Seams: Seams to be plumb within 1/16" in V-0".
2. Vertical Patterns: Vertical patterns to be plumb within 1/8" in 8'-0".
3. Horizontal Patterns: Horizontal patterns to be level within 1/8" in 10'-0".
F. Finished Appearance: Wallcovering to be clean and free of wrinkles, gaps, overlaps, fraying or raveling,
and other defects. Raising and puckering at seams, bubbles, blisters, telegraphing of adhesive spreader
marks, and other surface imperfections are not acceptable. Gaps are defined as a spacing of more than
1/128" between wallcovering panels, or between edge of wallcovering and adjacent material.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning of Fabric Wallcovering: Allow adhesive that appears through seams to dry. When dry, remove
with a dry brush. If additional adhesive removal is required, use only the method recommended by the
manufacturer for this expressed purpose. Do not wet fabric wallcovering.
1. When removing excess adhesive from surfaces adjacent to wallcovering, provide protection for fabric
wallcovering.
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 960
LUBBOCK TEXAS FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09 960-6
B. Cleaning of Adjacent Surfaces: Promptly remove all sealers, primers, adhesives, and other materials
which are spilled, splashed, or otherwise fall on adjacent surfaces, in a manner not to damage or discolor
the surface from which it is removed.
C. Final Clean-up: Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wallcovering installation --
upon completion of work. Leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition.
D. Protection: Provide protective methods and materials needed to ensure that wallcoverings will be without
deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 985
i^ LUBBOCK. TEXAS FABRIC -WRAPPED PANELS 09 985-1
4
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work includes, but is not limited to:
1. Fabrication, Delivery and Installation of new fabric wrapped panels as indicated on the Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre -Installation Job Meeting: If requested and prior to installation of work, conduct job meeting at the site
with primary materials installer, the installer of each component of the associated work, the representative
materials manufacturer, installers of other work requiring coordination, and Architect's and Owners's
t representative for the purpose of reviewing project requirements and procedures to be followed in
performing the work.
B. Reference Standards:
1. General:
a. Listing: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form part of this
specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed below are identified by number, edition
date, title, or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referred
to herein are referred to by an issuing authority abbreviation and a basic designation.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
E 84-84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, Test for.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Rated Construction: Wherever a fire -resistance classification (4-hr., 3-hr., and similar designation)
and sound transmission ratings (NRC range, STC range, and similar -designation) are shown,
scheduled or required, provide materials which have been tested and listed by Standard Building
Code for rated construction assembly.
a. Provide: Fabric panel installation in accordance with Standard Building Code Section 704.8 -
Application of Interior Finish.
D. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm which has experience in the installation of Work specified
herein.
a. Firm's Experience Period: 5 years of experience.
b. Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be acceptable to material manufacturer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section Cross -Reference: Submittals Section for submittal requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Product Data:
1. Specifications Data: Submit material specifications and installation data for products specified under
Part 2 - Products.
a. Recommendations: Submit manufacturers written recommendations.
b. Required Product Data Submittals: Fabric wrapped panels.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. General: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection not fully described by manufacturer's
data. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large scale details. Verify field dimensions prior to
preparing shop drawings.
a. Indicate required anchorage comer condition applications and accessory items, field dimensions,
and finishes.
b. Scale: Include plans and elevations at not less than 1/4" to 1'-0" scale, and details at not less than
r3" to 1'-0" scale.
l:
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 985
LUBBOCK TEXAS FABRIC -WRAPPED PANELS 09 985-2
D. Samples:
1. General: Review will be for monolithic appearance, seaming, and thickness.
2. Verification Samples: For verification purposes, submit complete sets of samples, illustrating full -
range of color and texture to be expected in the completed Work. Provide samples of the following
minimum size:
a. Submit one (1) 12" x 12" sample for each fabric specified showing substrate, tackable core, each
edge/corner condition, hardware (as it affects locking channels and fabric).
E. Certificates: "-
1. Submit certificate showing compliance with fire -ratings.
F. Maintenance / Replacement Materials:
1. Provide maintenance data for panel finish face to include precautions for cleaning materials and
methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.
2. Provide replacement fabric equal to 2% required to complete work for Attic Stock. Deliver attic stock
fabric to User Agency prior to beginning installation of panels. —
G. Submittal Schedule:
1. Before Installation:
a. Manufacturer's Product Data
b. Shop Drawings
c. Samples
2. After Installation:
a. Certificates
b. Maintenance / Replacement Materials
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT/MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
A. Source Quality Control:
1. Source:
a. Obtain primary materials (of each type) from a single manufacturer or source to ensure matching
of quality, color, pattern, and texture.
b. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
c. Do not change source or brands of materials during course of construction.
d. Installer has single source responsibility for all components of fabric wrapped panels.
B. Fabric Panels:
1. Thickness: 1 inch
2. Fabric:
a. (1) Manufacturer: Guilford of Maine
(a) Product: FR 701
(b) Style: 2100
(c) Weave: Plain
(d) Yam: 2-ply
(e) Contents: 100% Polyester
(f) Weight: 16.0 ounces per lineal yard
(g) Width: 66 inches Useable
(h) Color: (Standard color to be selected by the Architect)
(i) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's sample and data on file with the Architect.
3. Fabric Backing: All fabric used on panels should be backed per fabric wrapped panel manufacturer's
recommendations. —
4. Edge/Comer: Square
5. Size: As indicated on the Drawings. Panel dimensions shall be presized by the manufacturer from
field dimensions provided by the installing contractor to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
6. Mounting Method: Manufacturer shall provide a mechanical system using concealed panel z-clips —
manufactured of galvanized steel permanently attached to rear of panels and a matching z-track
leveled and attached to wall per manufacturer's standard recommendations.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 985
LUBBOCK TEXAS FABRIC -WRAPPED PANELS 09 985-3
F
., 7. Core: 7 pounds per cubic foot density fiber glass core with chemically hardened edges to a minimum
of 1/8 inch penetration. Wood or metal is not acceptable.
w
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
AVL Systems
b.
Decoustics
c.
Acousticon
d.
Vicracoustic Inc.
(" e.
Accutrack
r f.
Conwed
22 FABRICATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to fabrication.
B. Identify all panels with code numbering sequence for initial installation and subsequent replacement
coordination.
C. Panels:
1. Panels shall be covered on front face and returned at the edges to the back face not less than 2
inches with tailored comers.
2. Fabric straight and on the grain. No seams allowed.
3. Stretch fabric tight and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions. Repair sagging. Full fabric
gluing to panel face will not be accepted.
4. Fabric pattern shall be matched for uniform appearance and alignment, to each adjoining panel, and
all panels running on same side of wall.
5. Batting: Stretch over surface and wrapped around edges.
6. Mounting Devices: Concealed on backside of panel.
2.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging.
t
B. Storage: Store materials in protective packaging to prevent damage prior to installation. Comply with
each manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1. Keep materials dray at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for sequencing and
scheduling of installation.
2. Sequencing/Scheduling:
a. Coordinate panel installation with other Work.
b. Where outlets occur, special care should be taken to coordinate these elements. Panels shall be
field fitted to meet existing conditions.
32 PREPARATION
A. Section Cross -Reference: Refer to Selective Demolition section for preparation requirements.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Inspection:
1. Examination: Examine substrates and conditions under which products of this section are to be
installed and verify that the Work may commence. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been fully resolved. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of
substrates and conditions.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 09 985 _
LUBBOCK, TEXAS FABRIC -WRAPPED PANELS 09 985-4
B. Install panels with a true and level line at top and bottom of panel.
1. General:
a. Vertical Joints: Butt Joint of Uniform Dimension
b. Horizontal Joints: 1/2" reveal joint of uniform dimension.
c. Comers: Square
2. Fasteners: Quantity mechanical fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Fabric shall be stretched over and locked into the framework with sufficient tension to insure a smooth,
firm, secure fabric surface and not show the fastening technique.
D. Concealed leveling angles shall be angles applied around bottom of panel as required.
E. Panel fabric coverings with patterns or directional weaves shall be applied to panels so pattern or weave
matches in adjacent panels.
F. Fabric Panels shall be readily removable in case of damage and easily replaced, without affecting
adjacent surfaces.
G. Provide Shim piece for Electrical outlets flush to face of Fabric Panel. Mount cover plate on Fabric Panel.
H. Remove and reinstall all existing wall mounted items, as required, at locations receiving Fabric -wrapped
Panels.
I. Paint all exposed reveals, top and bottom of panels, to match panel fabric color. Submit paint colors for
Architect's approval prior to installation. Owner to provide approval on paint base type to be used.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Finished Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of tears, stained areas or unraveled areas.
Remove defective Work and replace with acceptable Work.
B. Protection: Protect installed Work during construction period to prevent damage to panel surfaces.
END OF SECTION
'"
s
f
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 265
LUBBOCK TEXAS WALL SURFACE_ PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10 265-1
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of wall surface protection systems:
1. Wall protection systems, including:
a. Corner guards.
2. Door protection systems, including:
a. Kick plates.
b. Removal of existing corner guards and kickplates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each wall surface protection system component and installation accessory required,
including installation methods for each type of substrate. Provide written data on each required
component including physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading, and flame
resistance.
C. Shop drawings showing locations, extent, and installation details of wall and corner guards, and other
protection systems. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture, provide the
manufacturer's standard color chips consisting of actual sections of each vinyl plastic material required
showing the full range of materials, colors, and textures available.
E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of wall surface
protection system components with requirements indicated based on tests performed by the laboratory
within the past five years.
F. Maintenance data for wall surface protection system components for inclusion in the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1.
'1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has previously installed wall surface
protection systems similar in material, design, and extent to the systems indicated for this Project.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall surface protection system components that are identical
to those tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 for the fire performance characteristics indicated below.
Identify wall surface protection system components with appropriate markings from the testing and
inspection organization.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
C. Impact Strength: Provide wall surface protection system components with a minimum impact resistance
of 25.4 ft. Ibs per sq. ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM D 256 (Izod impact, ft. Ibs per inch notch).
• D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, grade, finish, and type of wall surface protection system
component from a single source with resources to provided products of consistent quality in appearance
�"' and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 265
LUBBOCK TEXAS WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10 265-2
E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile and dimensional requirements of wall surface
protection system components required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Wall
surface protection system components by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations
in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect.
The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with
identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification.
B. Store wall surface protection materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a
well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1. Maintain room temperature within the storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the
period plastic materials are stored. Keep sheet material out of direct sunlight to avoid surface
distortion.
2. Store rigid plastic corner guard covers in a vertical position, and rigid plastic wall guard and handrail
covers in a horizontal position for a minimum of 72 hours, or until the plastic material attains the
minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install wall surface protection system components until the space is
enclosed and weatherproof and until the ambient temperature within the building is maintained at not less
than 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours prior to beginning of the installation. Do not install
rigid plastic wall surface protection systems until that temperature has been attained and is stabilized.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Instructions: Provide the manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work.
Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic
and use conditions. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental
to finishes and performance.
B. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than 2 percent of each type, color, and
pattern of wall surface protection materials and components. Include accessory components as required.
Replacement materials shall be from the same production run as materials installed. Package
replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Balco Metalines, Inc.
a. Flush -mounted Corner Guard Type CGF-2
b. Surface -mounted Corner Guard Type CGS-2
c. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's brochure on file with the Architect.
2. Construction Specialties, Inc.
a. Acrovyn Flush -Mounted Corner Guard, SFS-20
b. Acrovyn Surface -Mounted Corner Guard, SSM-20
c. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's brochure on file with the Architect.
3. RJF International Corporation
a. Koroseal Flush -mounted Corner Guard, R100
b. Koroseal Surface -mounted Corner Guard, G110
c. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's brochure on file with the Architect.
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 265
LUBBOCK, TEXAS WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10 265-3
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface -Mounted, Resilient Plastic Corner Guards: Provide surface -mounted, resilient plastic corner
guard assembly consisting of a snap -on -type plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum retainer,
height as indicated.
B. Flush -Mounted, Resilient Plastic Corner Guards: Provide full -wall -height, flush -mounted, resilient plastic
comer guard assembly consisting of a snap -on -type plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum
retainer.
1. Cover shall be rigid, impact -resistant plastic, minimum 0.078 inch thick, in dimensions and profiles
indicated.
a. Corner Radius: 1/4 inch.
2. Retainer: Manufacturer's standard continuous, one-piece, extruded aluminum retainer, minimum
0.062 inch thick.
3. Sizes: In custom heights as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Accessories: Provide prefabricated, injection -molded top cap and aluminum base with concealed
splices, cushions, mounting hardware, and other accessories as required.
a. Top caps shall match color of plastic covers and shall be field adjustable for close alignment with
snap -on plastic covers.
C. Fire -Rated, Resilient Plastic Corner Guards: Provide full -wall -height, resilient plastic corner guard
assembly consisting of a snap -on -type plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum retainer and
a continuous galvanized or stainless steel covered intumescent fire barrier.
1. Fire Rating: Underwriters Laboratories rated 2-hour assembly.
2. Cover shall be rigid, impact -resistant plastic, minimum 0.100 inch thick, in dimensions and profiles
indicated.
a. Corner Radius: 1/4 inch.
3. Retainer: Manufacturer's standard continuous, one-piece, extruded aluminum retainer, minimum
0.109 inch thick, attached to a galvanized steel cover over the manufacturer's standard intumescent
fire barrier.
4. Sizes: In custom heights as indicated on the Drawings.'
5. Accessories: Provide aluminum base with concealed splices, cushions, mounting hardware, and other
accessories as required.
2.3 DOOR PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A. Door Surface Protection: Provide the manufacturer's standard rigid, 0.0604nch-thick minimum,
embossed, impact -resistant plastic door panel protection plates with beveled edges. Plates shall comply
with fire performance characteristics specified and be chemical- and stain -resistant. Comply with
requirements of ANSI Al56.6. Provide the following:
1. Kick Plate: Sizes as indicated on the Drawings.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wall and door protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thicknesses of components.
B. Preassemble components in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of
evidence of wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, and other imperfections. Fabricate members
and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
D. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors for interconnection of members to other construction.
E. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting components to concrete or masonry.
Fabricate anchoring devices to be capable of withstanding imposed loads. Coordinate anchoring devices
with the supporting structure.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 265
LUBBOCK TEXAS WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10 265-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions in which wall surface protection components and wall protection systems
will be installed.
1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of wall surface
protection system materials.
B. Impact -Resistant Wall Covering Materials: Wall surfaces to receive impact -resistant wall covering
materials shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, loose paint, and scale.
C. Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Prior to installation remove existing corner guards and kick plates, fill holes and cracks, sand
smooth and, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install wall surface protection units plumb, level, and true to line without distortions.
1. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the
finished work.
B. Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of over 20 feet, splice aluminum retainer and plastic cover at
different locations along the run.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard ammonia based household cleaning agent. Clean metal components in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. r..
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and --
leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition.
END OF SECTION
F
a
L.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 425
LUBBOCK, TEXAS SIGNS 10 425-1
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of signs:
1. Panel signs.
2. Dimensional letters.
3. Plaques
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale
sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement,
accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering
layout.
2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in
other Sections.
3. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and
numbers.
D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and
surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.
1. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements
indicated:
a. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide a sample panel not less than 8-1 /2 inches by 11 inches for each
material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample of
the graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and finishes of letters,
numbers, and other graphic devices.
b. Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples of each dimensional letter type
required, showing letter style, color, and material finish and method of attachment.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this
Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce
sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
B. Single -Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a
single manufacturer.
C. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are
based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered
provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the
Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 425
LUBBOCK TEXAS SIGNS 10 425-2
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to
ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. —
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs: "—
a. APCO Graphics, Inc.
b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
c. Mohawk Sign Systems. _
d. Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
e. The Supersine Company.
f. Vomar Products, Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters:
a. Andco Industries Corp.
b. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. AS[ Sign Systems, Inc.
d. Gemini, Inc. --
e. Metal Arts.
f. Metallic Arts, Inc.
g. Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
h. Vomar Products, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic
sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested
according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80
deg C), and of the following general types:
1. Transparent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "clear," provide colorless sheet in matte
finish, with light transmittance of 92 percent, when tested according to the requirements of ASTM
D 1003.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide aluminum extrusion of alloy and temper recommended by the sign
manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties specified in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5.
C. Bronze Plate: Provide bronze plate, copper alloy UNS C28000, Muntz Metal, 60 percent copper.
D. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and
mounting surface.
E. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot -dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior
installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt —
devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
F. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and
background colors, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic --
surface and are nonfading for the application intended.
2.3 PANEL SIGNS
A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs,
shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 426
r LUBBOCK TEXAS .SIGNS 10 425-3
t
r 1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions
E
within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
B. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with
the following requirements:
1. Edge Condition: Square cut.
2. Corner Condition: Square corners.
3. Material: Acrylic plastic.
C. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket -mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit sign
panel construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory -paint brackets in a color matching the
background color of the sign panel.
D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style,
spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.
E. Subsurface Copy: Apply copy to the back face of clear acrylic sheet forming the panel face by process
indicated to produce precisely formed opaque images free from rough edges.
1. Use reverse silk-screen process to print copy; overspray the copy with an opaque background color
coating.
2. Use Dupont Chromalin heat- and pressure -laminated photopolymer film system to form copy and
background color.
a. The manufacturer has the option of selecting either process indicated above.
3. Panel Material: Matte -finished clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating subsurface applied.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS
A. Cast Letters: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces,
sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects.
Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with
requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
1. Metal: Aluminum.
2. Letter Height: As indicated on the Drawings.
3. Letter Style: Condensed Ribbon 512
2.5 CAST METAL PLAQUES
A. Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply with requirements
specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for
thickness, size, shape and copy. Hand -tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce the
manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Refer to the "Finishes" Article for other finish requirements.
1. Metal: Aluminum
2. Border Style: To be selected by the Architect
l 3. Icon Symbol: International symbol graphic to be selected from manufacturers symbol library. Final
artwork to be approved by Architect.
r., 4. Background Finish: Provide dark statuary finish to comply with the requirement specified for bronze
finishes, except provide background texture specified above in lien of mechanical finish.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral
or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches
Indicated.
1. Panels Signs: Custom colors to match Architect's sample.
2. Cast Letters and Plaques: Dark Bronze Duranodic finish.
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 425
LUBBOCK, TEXAS SIGNS 10 425-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type --
described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other
defects in appearance.
B. Wall -Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below:
1. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch-thick concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and
countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. _
Attach the plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to the substrate. Attach
panel sign units to the plate using the method specified above.
C. Dimensional Letters: Mount letters using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer
for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy
paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
1. Projected Mounting: Mount letters at the projection distance from the wall surface indicated..
D. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the manufacturer for
the type of wall surface indicated.
1. Concealed Mounting: Mountthe plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back of
the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick -setting cement.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units
from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
ro,
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 651
LUBBOCK, TEXAS OPERABLE PANEL;PARTITION REFURBISHMENT 10 651-1
i
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply
to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. The work includes, but is not limited to:
1. Removal and replacement of wallcovering on existing operable panel partitions, associated
accessories, storage pocket enclosures, etc.
2. Miscellaneous preparation, repair and patchwork associated with operable panel finish surface
refurbishment.
3. All Work herein is listed as an Altemate.
a. Refer to Section 01 030 ALTERNATE NO. 1
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre -Installation Job Meeting: 9 requested and prior to installation of work, conduct job meeting at the site
with primary installer, the installer of each component of the associated work, the representative materials
manufacturer, installers of other work requiring coordination, and Architect's and Owner's representative
for the purpose of reviewing project requirements and procedures to be followed in performing the work.
B. Reference Standards:
1. General:
a. Listing: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form part of this
specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed below are identified by number, edition
date, title, or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referred
to herein are referred to by an issuing authority abbreviation and basic designation.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
E 84-84 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm which has experience in the installation of Work specified
herein.
a. Firm's Experience Period: 5 years of experience.
b. Manufacturer's Acceptance: Installer shall be acceptable to material manufacturer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section Cross -Reference: Submittals Section for submittal requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Product Data:
1. Specifications Data: Submit material specifications and installation data for products specified under
Part 2 - Products.
a. Recommendations: Submit manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Required Product Data Submittals: Operable panel partition refurbishment.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. General: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection not fully described by manufacturer's data.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and large scale details. Verify field dimensions prior to preparing
shop drawings.
D. Samples:
1. Verifications Samples: For verification purposes, submit complete sets of samples, illustrating full
range of color texture to be expected in the completed work. Include similar samples of material for
panel edges and accessories involving color selection. Provide samples of the following:
a. Full width sample, not less than 36 inches long, with specified treatments applied. Show complete
pattem repeat.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 651
LUBBOCK, TEXAS OPERABLE PANEL PARTITION REFURBISHMENT 10 651-2
b. Submit one (1) 12" x 12" sample for each specified fabric adhered to panel face. Showing each
edge/comer condition panel edge material.
E. Certificates:
1. Submit certificate showing compliance with fire -ratings.
F. Maintenance / Replacement Materials:
1. Provide maintenance data for panel finish face to include precautions for cleaning materials and
methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. —
2. Provide replacement fabric equal to 5% required to complete the work for Attic Stock. Deliver attic
stock fabric to User Agency prior to beginning installation.
G. Submittal Schedule:
1. Before Installation:
a. Manufacturer's Product Data
b. Shop Drawings
c. Samples
2. After Installation:
a. Certificates
b. Maintenance / Replacement Materials
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT/MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
A. Source Quality Control:
1. Source:
a. Obtain primary materials (of each type) from a single manufacturer or source to ensure matching
of quality, color, pattern, and texture.
b. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
c. Do not change source or brands of materials during course of construction.
B. Existing operable panel partitions:
1. Existing Conditions: Product type, panel configuration, sizes, accessories, etc. to be field verified by
the Contractor and Installer.
C. Finish Surface:
1. Manufacturer's standard acoustical wall fabric, complying with ASTM E-84 Class A Flame Rating, --
Acoustical rating ANSI-ASTM C423 N.R.C..70, passes UBC 42-2, passes, Phoenix Comer Bum Test,
Mildew and mold resistant
a. Manufacturer: JM Lynne
(a) Product: Silence FR —
(b) Total Weight: 24 ounces per linear yard
(c) Roll Width: 54 inches
(d) Content: 100% Polyester _
(e) Backing: Flame Retardant Acrylic Backing
(f) Color: (Standard, to be selected by the Architect)
(g) Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's sample and data on file with the Architect.
D. Adhesive:
1. Panel Manufacturer's recommended heavy duty vinyl adhesive, low water type which dry clear of
translucent.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to fabrication.
B. Panels: Contractor to prepare panels and apply new finish per instructions as recommended by the
Operable Panel Partition manufacturer.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 10 651
LUBBOCK, TEXAS OPERABLE PANEL PARTITION REFURBISHMENT 10 651-3
E€:
rr 2.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
f
B A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging.
B. Storage: Store materials in protective packaging to prevent damage prior to installation. Comply with
each manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1. Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for sequencing and
scheduling of installation.
1. Sequencing/Scheduling:
a. Coordinate operable panel partition refurbishment installation with other Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Section Cross -Reference: Refer to Selective Demolition section for preparation requirements.
B. Surface Preparation: follow manufacturer's instructions for surface preparation, remove all existing
wallcovering, sand and fill surface protrusions and low spots.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Inspection:
1. Examination: Examine substrates and conditions under which products of this section are to be
installed and verify that the Work may commence. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been fully resolved. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of
substrates and conditions.
B. Install operable panel partition wallcovering and accessories in strict compliance with manufacturer's
written instructions for finish surface refurbishment and installation
1. Trim edges so as to balance seam between ribs using a sharpened cutting tool at all times.
2. Position the striped selvage on left-hand side when cutting and installing.
3. Apply heavy-duty pre -mixed vinyl adhesive to walls with a 3/8 inch nap paste roller.
4. Trim fabric on flat table prior to installing
5. Install fabric from top to bottom, between two plumb lines for absolute vertical alignment.
6. Fabric should be firmly pressed to wall using 1/4 inch nap roller to insure maximum contact with
adhesive.
' C. Fabric coverings with pattems or directional weaves shall be applied to panels so pattern or weave
matches in adjacent panels.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Finished Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of tears, stained areas or unraveled areas.
Remove defective Work and replace with acceptable Work.
B. Protection: Protect installed Work during construction period to prevent damage to panel surfaces.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 11 132
ro LUBBOCK TEXAS PROJECTION SCREENS 11 132-1
p
E
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Removal and reinstallation of existing projection screens.
2. Installation of new electrically operated front projection screens, in existing construction.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Sections for electrical wiring, connections, and installation of remote control switches for
electrically operated projection screens.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of screen specified.
C. Wiring diagram for electrically operated units.
D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of projection screens. Show the following:
1. Location of screen centerline.
2. Location of wiring connections.
3. Seams in viewing surfaces.
4. Connections to suspension systems for pendant -mounted and recess. -mounted screens.
5. Anchorage details.
6. Accessories.
7. Frame details for front projection screens.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from a single manufacturer
as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories.
B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction
supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression
system, and partitions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where
screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to take place.
B. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation.
C. Protect surfaces of rear projection screens from damage due to abrasion, dust, and other conditions.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PROJECTION SCREEN SURFACES, GENERAL
A. Material and Viewing Surface of Front Projection Screens: Obtain screens manufactured from mildew -
and flame -resistant fabric of type indicated for each type of screen specified and complying with the
following requirements:
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 11 132
LUBBOCK, TEXAS PROJECTION SCREENS 11 132-2
1. Matte white viewing surface with minimum gain characteristics complying with FS GG-S-00172D(1)
for Type A screen surface.
a. Application: Provide matte white surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
2. Glass beaded viewing surface with minimum gain characteristics complying with FS GG-S-00172D(1)
for Type C screen surface.
a. Application: Provide glass beaded surfaces where indicated.
3. Seams: Where length of screen indicated exceeds maximum length produced without seams in fabric
specified, provide screen with horizontal seam placed as follows:
a. At top of screen at juncture between extra drop and viewing surface.
4. Seamless Construction: Provide screens in sizes indicated without seams.
5. Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew -resistant screen fabrics as determined by Federal Standard
191 A/5760.
6. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide projection screen fabrics identical to those materials that
have undergone testing and passed requirements for flame resistance as indicated below:
a. NFPA 701 per small-scale test.
b. Federal Standard 191A/5903 for test method. FS GG-S-00172D(1) for flame resistance.
2.2 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard UL-listed and UL-marked units consisting of case, screen,
motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components required for a complete installation and
to comply with requirements indicated for screen surface and controls and for case, motor, and screen
under description of operation and type. Remotely control operation of each screen to comply with the
following:
1. Single Station Control: Three -position, UL-listed control switch for each screen with metal device box
and cover plate for flush wall mounting and for connection to 120 V a.c. power supply.
B. End -Mounted -Motor -Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure: Units designed and fabricated
for recessed installation in ceiling with bottom of case composed of two panels fully enclosing screen and
motor, one panel hinged and connected to drive mechanism to open and close automatically when screen
is lowered and fully raised and the other panel removable or openable for access to interior of case; and
complying with the following requirements:
1. Screen Case: Wood sides and top with metal -lined motor compartment and wood or aluminum
bottom panels, factory -primed and constructed as follows:
a. Offset mount bottom panels to case in position where their bottom surfaces will align flush with
finished surface of adjoining ceiling and the bottom edges of case surrounding panels will be
recessed by the depth of, and concealed behind, overlapping ceiling finish.
2. Motor: Instant reversing, gear drive motor of size and capacity recommended by screen manufacturer
with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal overload protection, preset limit switches
to automatically stop screen in "up" and "down" positions, and positive stop action to prevent coasting.
Locate motor in its own compartment as follows:
a. On right end of screen, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Screen: As indicated below, with top edge mounted on, and securely anchored to, rigid metal roller
supported by self -aligning bearings in brackets.
a. Material: Vinyl -coated glass fiber fabric.
b. Size of Viewing Surface: As indicated. _
c. Provide extra drop length of dimension indicated to comply with the following requirements for
fabric color and location of drop length:
(1) Color: Black.
(2) Location: At top of screen. _
C. Motor -In -Roller -Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure: Units designed and fabricated for
recessed installation in ceiling with bottom of case composed of two panels fully enclosing screen and
wiring compartments, one panel hinged and activated by operation of screen to open and close --
automatically when screen is lowered and fully raised and the other panel removable or openable for
access to interior of case; and complying with the following requirements:
1. Screen Case: Wood sides and top with metal -lined wiring compartment and wood or aluminum
bottom panels, factory -primed and constructed as follows:
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 11 132
r LUBBOCK TEXAS PROJECTION SCREENS 11 132-3
i.:
2. Motor: Instant reversing motor of size and capacity recommended by screen manufacturer with
permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal overload protection, preset limit switches to
automatically stop screen in "up" and "down" positions, and positive stop action to prevent coasting.
Mount motor inside roller with vibration insulators to reduce noise transmission.
3. Screen: As indicated below, with top edge mounted on, and securely anchored to, 3-inch-diameter
rigid metal roller supported by vibration- and noise -absorbing supports and bottom edge formed into
a pocket holding a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod with ends of rod protected by plastic caps.
a. Material: Vinyl -coated glass fiber fabric.
b. Size of Viewing Surface: As indicated.
c. Provide extra drop length of dimension indicated to comply with the following requirements for
fabric color and location of drop length:
(1) Color: Black.
(2) Location: At top of screen.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. End -Mounted -Motor -Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure:
a. "Executive Electrol," Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc.
b. "Ambassador," Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc.
2. Motor -In -Roller -Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure:
a. "Rollfix Trapdoor," Bretford Manufacturing, Inc.
b. "BoardRoom," Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc.
c. "Envoy," Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc.
3. End -Mounted -Motor -Operated Screens Without Ceiling Closure:
a. "Series 700," Bretford Manufacturing, Inc.
b. "Series 900," Bretford Manufacturing, Inc.
c. "Senior Electrol," Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc.
d. "Rolle"ramic," Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc.
4. Motor -In -Roller -Operated Screens:
a. "Rollfix Electric," Bretford Manufacturing, Inc.
b. "Cosmopolitan," Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc.
c. "Targa," Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc.
d. "Model A," Stewart Filmscreen Corp.
e. "Model A-B," Stewart Filmscreen Corp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Remove all existing projection screens indicated "To Be Removed".
a. Salvage, protect and return to the User Agency, all existing projection screens to be removed.
2. Relocate all existing projection screens indicated to be "Removed and Reinstalled" to new locations
as per the drawings.
B. Install front projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as
Indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner that produces a smoothly operating
screen with plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when screen is
lowered.
1. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure and other
► . operating components are in optimum functioning condition.
'.. 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite such protection
damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in
their original, undamaged condition.
END OF SECTION
i
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 12 520
LUBBOCK TEXAS MOTORIZED SHADES 12 520-1
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
Division 1 Specifications, and Division 16 Sections for electrical wiring, connections, and installation of
remote control switches apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The Work shall include, but is not limited to the following:
1. Motor system: electrical connections, motor housing, all switches, boxes required for wiring,
customized control boards.
2. Hardware Accessories: shade housing and support brackets
3. Shade fabrics: sun -screen
4. Anchoring means and methods
5. Access Doors as required in drywall ceilings at motor locations
6. Shade Locations as per the drawings
B. All Work relating to the fabrication, delivery and installation of motorized shades herein is listed as an
Aliemate No. 2.
1. Refer to Section 01 030 ALTERNATES
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Quality Control: Obtain each type of roller shade from one source and by a single manufacturer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to product fabrication, submit to the Architect, manufacturer's specifications and
installation instructions for each type of window shading unit required. Include methods of installation for
each type of opening and mounting.
1. Submit manufacturer's warranty for all product and materials.
B. Maintenance: Submit to the User Agency, maintenance data for shades to include:
k 1. Methods for maintaining shades and finishes.
l 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and
performance.
C. Shop Drawings: Prior to product fabrication, submit shop drawings for approval by Architect. Show
location and extent of shades. Show installation details and relationship to adjoining work. Indicate
special components and application conditions of window shade units which are not fully dimensioned
or detailed in manufacturer's product data.
l 1. Elevations: Include typical elevation layout indicating dimensions of window openings related to
shade mounting.
D. Samples for initial color selection: Prior to fabrication, submit manufacturer's full range of colors, textures,
and patterns available for shade type as indicated.
�. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Feld Measurements: Check actual shade dimensions by accurate field measurements before fabrication,
and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
B. Coordinate fabrication and installation schedule with the User Agency to avoid delaying the Work.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Maintenance Materials (Extra Stock): Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Fumish
maintenance material matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with appropriate labels.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 12 520
LUBBOCK TEXAS MOTORIZED SHADES 12 520-2
1. Typical Window Shading Units: Furnish quantity of typical window shading units equal to 5% of
amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
A. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Acceptable Product:
a. Manufacturer: MechoShade
(1) Product: ThermoVeil2100 Series
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Provide manufacturer's customized roller shade system as follows: _
1. Shade Fabric: 2100 Series Open Basket Weave. Color: 2113 Grey
2. Operation: Motorized (electric) operation wired for group control of all shades within a room.
a. Motors to be asynchronous, single phase with built-in limit switches to regulate upper and lower
stopping positions. Motor to be integral with motor shade head, thermally protected, lubricated _.
for lifetime service and UL approved.
3. Mounting: Use standard mounting bracket; Provide continuous fascia panel; Outside mount per the
Drawings.
4. Hem Bar: Manufacturer's standard heat welded fabric covered hem bar. --
5. Metal Finishes: Provide custom color aluminum or steel construction of baked enamel or polyester
paint.
a. Color to match Aluminum Glazing Members; Match Architect's sample.
6. Attachment: Fabrication and installation to be as recommended by the manufacturer without exposed
fastener's.
7. Refer to the Drawings for locations and extent of shades.
B. Cutting: Cut shading material to suit window size, hemmed at bottom and top, or proper width to provide "-
clearance for brackets indicated or required; (completely fill the openings as indicated, from head -to -sill
and jamb -to -jamb).
C. Shade Securement: Secure shading material to roller with metal window shade tracks or their equivalent.
D. Lengths: Furnish shade material in lengths not less than 12" longer than actual window dimensions to
permit shade to be operated full length without tearing from roller.
2.3 SHADE SCHEDULE
SHADE BANDS OPENING SIZE (Field verify) NO. MOTORS/SWITCHES
4 120" W x 306" H 4 2
2 144" W x 185" H (Banded) 1 1
Note: All dimensions are approximate. Actual opening dimensions shall be field verified by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION AND OPERATION
A. Field Verification: Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site measurements.
Adjust dimensions for proper fit at openings.
B. Sequencing: Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the work.
Cooperate with other trades for securing tracks to substrates and other finished surfaces. _
i
i LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 12 520
r" LUBBOCK TEXAS MOTORIZED SHADES 12 520-3
C. Materials: Fabricate shade components from non -corrosive, non -staining, non -fading materials which are
completely compatible with each other, and which do not require lubrication during normal expected life.
D. Window Installations: Fabricate units to completely fill openings as shown, from head -to -sill and jamb -to -
jamb.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install window shading units to comply with manufacturer's printed instructions to suit types of
mountings required. Install level, secure and at proper height to provide maximum coverage. Cooperate
with other trades for securing window shades to finished surfaces.
B. Adjusting: Adjust components and accessories for proper operation.
C. Cleaning: Clean shade surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation.
1. Remove surplus materials. rubbish and debris resulting from installation. Leave installation areas
neat, clean and ready to use.
D. Protection: Protect installed units to ensure their being in satisfactory operating condition, without
damage, blemishes, or indication of use at end of project. Repair or replace damaged units as directed
by Architect.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Demonstrate the operation of all shades installed. Movement of shades shall be smooth and quiet.
Shades in series shall operate and move without binding or abrasion.
B. Provide Owner with names, addresses and telephone numbers of service organization(s) authorized to
do such repair and/or maintenance work, should the need arise.
END OF SECTION
I
I^
i LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 12 541
LUBBOCK, TEXAS DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS 12 541-1
f -
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings apply to this section,
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish , deliver and install all work as
specified herein and required by job conditions.
B. The work shall include, but is not limited to the following:
1. Removal of existing Stage Curtains and Draperies.
2. Repairs and replacement of drapery and curtain hardware and accessories, as required, to complete
installation.
3. Fabrication and installation of new Draperies and Curtains.
4. Extent of work as per the Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Quality Control:
1. Source:
a. Obtain primary materials (of each type) from a single manufacturer or source to ensure matching
of quality, color. pattern, and texture.
b. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
c. Do not change source or brands of materials during course of construction.
d. Installer has single source responsibility for all components of the Drapery / Curtain assembly.
B. Pre -installation Job Meeting: Conduct a Pre -Installation Job meeting with the Owner and
Representatives.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to product fabrication, submit to the Architect, manufacturer's specifications and
P P
installation instructions for each type of drapery and curtain assembly required. Include methods of
installation for each type of opening and mounting.
1. Submit manufacturer's warranty for all product and materials.
B. Maintenance: Submit to the User Agency, maintenance data for window drapery assembly to include:
l 1. Methods for maintaining drapery and curtain assembly and finishes.
l 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes, fabrics and
performance.
C. Shop Drawings: Prior to product fabrication, submit shop drawings for approval by Architect. Show
location and extent of drapery and curtain assemblies. Show installation details and relationship to
adjoining work. Indicate special components and application conditions of window drapery assemblies
which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.
1. Elevations: Include typical elevation layout indicating dimensions of window openings related to
drapery and curtain assembly mounting.
2. Indicate over all dimension, width and depth of "stack", for each drapery assembly.
D. Verification Samples: Priorto fabrication, submit samples of each component, material, fabric and finish
which will be exposed to view, for each type of drapery and curtain assembly required. Prepare samples
from same materials to be used for the Work.
t ; E. Custom color fabric samples: Custom fabric color to match Architect's sample for draperies and curtains
shall be submitted to the Architect for approval within fourteen (14) calendar days upon receipt of notice
�+ to proceed from the Owner. (Architect's sample is available upon request, during the bidding period.)
6 .
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 12 541
LUBBOCK, TEXAS DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS 12 541-2
F. Samples for Selection by Architect: Prior to fabrication, submit samples where color options are available
and not indicated in the specifications, for each component, material, fabric and finish which will be
exposed to view, for each type of window drapery assembly required.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual drapery assembly dimensions by accurate field measurements before
fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
B. Coordinate fabrication and installation schedule with the User Agency to avoid delaying the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty, executed by the Fabric and Materials
Manufacturer and the Contractor/Installer, agreeing to repair draperies and curtains which fail in materials
or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a
limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) year warranty period begins from date of the Final Certificate of the Architect.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Maintenance Materials (Extra Stock): Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish
maintenance material matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with appropriate labels.
1. Drapery, Curtain and Lining Materials: Furnish yardage equal to 5 percent of amount total amount
installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT/MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
AATCC: American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
UFAC: Upholstered Furniture Action Council
A. Stage Curtain Fabric (TYPE A & B):
1. Type: Velour
a. Color: (custom solid color to match architect's sample)
2. Width: 54 inches
3. Composition (pile/back): 100% Trevira CS
4. Weight: 24.0 ounces per yard
5. Back coating: manufacturer's recommended back coating as required --
6. Tear Strength (warp/filling): FMA Category II, ASTM D-2262, 7.0 kgf, 15.4 lbs., 68.7 N
7. Breaking Strength: Method ASTM D-3597-81, (warp): 59.2 kgf, 130.3 lbs., 579.8 N; (filling): 62.0 kgf,
136.4 lbs, 606.9 N
8. Seam Strength: Method CAN2-4.2, M77 Method 32, (warp): 45.55 kgf, 100.21 lbs, 445.90 N; (filling):
41.56 kgf, 91.43 lbs, 406.87 N
9. Abrasion (warp/filling): Method ASTM D-4157, exceeds 100,000 double rubs
10. Shrinkage (warp/filling): Method ASTM D-3597-81, 1.2%
11. Light fastness: light shade 100 hrs, dark shade 100 hrs
12. Crocking: Method AATCC-8-1972, (light shade) wet: 5, dry: 5; (dark shade) wet: 4, dry: 4
13. Flame resistant: UFAC Class 1, NFPA 701-small scale, NFPA 701-large scale
B. Acceptable Stage Curtain Fabric Manufacturers and Products:
1. Manufacturer: Dazian Fabrics
132 Gardenia Avenue, Pointe Vedra Beach, FL 32082
contact: David Johnson, 904.285.0041
a. Product: 30681 Angelo Velour
b. Product Data Publication: Manufacture's Brochure on file with the Architect.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 12 641
r LUBBOCK, TEXAS DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS 12 541-3
2. Manufacturer: KM Fabrics, Inc.
Box 7379 Branwood Station, Greenville, SC 29611
Tel: 803.295.2550
a. Product: Empire
3. Manufacturer: Valley Forge Fabrics, Inc.
6881 N.W. 16th Terrace, Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33309
contact: Angela Seitz, 305.971.1776
a. Product: Vanguard Velvet
b. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with the Architect.
4. Manufacturer: Gerriets International
R.D. #1, 950 Hutchinson Road, Allentown, New Jersey, 08501
contact: Bruce Galambos, 609.758.9121
a. Product: Lido Plus
b. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with the Architect.
5. Manufacturer: DesignTex Fabrics, Inc.
Two Piedmont Center, Suite 210, Atlanta, GA, 30305
contact: Jacqueline Lankford, 404.237.6415
a. Product: Unique Solutions Trevira Velvet
b. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with the Architect.
i C. Drapery Fabric (TYPE C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K & L) (To be issued in an addendum):
1. Type:
a. Color:
2. Width: 54 inches
3. Composition (pile/back): 100% Trevira CS
D. Acceptable Drapery Manufacturers and Products:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Product:
b. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with the Architect.
E. Acceptable Drapery Manufacturers and Products:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Product:
b. Product Data Publication: Manufacturer's Brochure on file with the Architect.
F. Acceptable Stage Curtain Lining Manufacturer:
1. Acceptable Product-
a. Product: (submit lining fabric of 100% Polyester, washable, permanently flame resistant
complying with NFPA-701, rating: Pass, to be approved by Architect)
(1) Color: (match Drapery and Curtain Fabric indicated)
(2) Weight: (match existing Drapery and Curtain lining fabric)
(3) Width: 54 inches
(4) Contents: 100% Polyester
G. Acceptable Drapery and Curtain Hardware Manufacturer:
1. Acceptable Product:
a. Manufacturer: (match existing product for refurbishment parts or approved equal)
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Draperies, Curtains and Drapery panels shall extend from within 1/4 inch of ceiling or drapery track
recess to within 1/2 inch of finished floor, unless otherwise noted.
B. Fabricate drapery and curtain assembly to hang parallel to wall at each end of run.
C. Draperies and Curtains at wall returns shall be flat to wall. Pleats shall hang vertically. Casement and
F track shall not be exposed to view.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 12 541
LUBBOCK TEXAS DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS 12 541-4
D. Align patterns vertically and horizontally. Face of "nap" to run in same direction, panel to panel and
curtain to curtain.
E. Thread: Color to match fabric sewn.
F. Hems: Full double -folded and finished with blind stitch. Even and flat with no rack, roll, or wrinkle.
1. Ends: Square with covered hem weights.
2. Hem height: 6 inch
G. Seams: Flat, without puckers. Overcast serge raw edges. Remove salvages. No horizontal seams.
H. Lining: Secure at heading to prevent roll -up or separation from drapery.
I. Identify each drapery and curtain unit with cloth label indicating location, finished width and length, and
recommended cleaning procedures.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Provide manufacturer's customized system for Stage Curtains as follows:
1. Operation: (existing motorized system)
2. Track: (existing motorized system)
3. Sliders and Components: Manufacturer's standard, sized for span and weight of drapery indicated.
4. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to
track hardware and adjoining construction and to support track and window treatment units under
conditions or normal use.
B. Provide manufacturer's customized system for Draperies as follows:
1. Operation: (existing manual system)
2. Track: (existing manual system)
3. Sliders and Components: Manufacturer's standard, sized for span and weight of drapery indicated.
4. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to
track hardware and adjoining construction and to support track and window treatment units under
conditions or normal use.
C. Refer to the Drawings for locations and extent of Drapery and Curtain Assemblies.
2.4 WINDOW DRAPERY AND CURTAIN ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE
TYPE
ROOM/LOCATION
ROOM NO.
COMMENTS
A
Banquet Stage Curtain
Fully Lined
B
Exhibit Hall Curtains
Fully Lined
C
Terrace Suite
C-223
(2) Draperies with
sheer layer; Fully
Lined
D
Hospitality Suite
E-147
Unlined
E
Reception
C-202
Unlined
F
Conference Room
C-203
Fully Lined
G
Manager's Office
C-204
Fully Lined
H
Lounge
C-210
Fully Lined
I
Office
C-211
Fully Lined
J
Office
C212
Fully Lined
r
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 12 541
+" LUBBOCK, TEXAS DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS 12 541-5
I
TYPE ROOMILOCATION ROOM NO. COMMENTS
l K Office C-213 Fully Lined
L Office C-214 Fully Lined
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Remove all existing Draperies and Curtains indicated "to be removed and replaced" with the extend of
the renovation work.
1. Existing Drapery and Curtain track and hardware to support new Drapery and Curtain installation.
B. Examination: Examine openings for suitable conditions where draperies are to be installed. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Cooperate with other trades for securing
drapery assemblies to finished surfaces.
C. Hardware: Replace any hardware parts or accessories, track, slider and components as required, to
complete new installation.
1. New hardware shall match or be compatible with operation of existing system.
D. General: Install Draperies and Curtains to comply with manufacturer's printed instructions to suit types
of mounting required. Install level, plumb, secure and at proper height to provide maximum coverage.
1. Drapery and Curtains shall traverse without rubbing against track or trim.
2. Drapery and Curtains shall stack evenly when fully open and shall extend across opening with
uniform appearance.
3. Drapery and Curtain panels shall hang without wrinkles.
E. Adjusting: Adjust components and accessories for proper operation.
F. Cleaning: Clean Drapery and Curtain surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation.
1. Remove surplus materials. rubbish and debris resulting from installation. Leave installation areas
neat, clean and ready to use.
G. Protection: Protect installed units to ensure their being in satisfactory operating condition, without
damage, blemishes, or indication of use at end of project. Repair or replace damaged units as directed
by Architect.
END OF SECTION
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 010
LUBBOCK TEXAS GENERAL 15 010-1
i
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials and
labor as required for the installation of a plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems,
all as shown on the drawings, as herein specified, or both.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations of the General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and General Requirements for work required under this section.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. This Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all submittal data covering proposed equipment to the
Architect for approval prior to installation. All equipment shall be submitted at one time in a bound
folder with an index of submittal.
1.4 REGULATIONS
A. All work shall be done in strict accordance and compliance with State and Local Laws, together with
regulations of the particular Utility Companies concerned.
B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities.
1.5 DRAWINGS
A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Each Contractor shall check
these drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or
omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor
with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of
r. sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work
required by the complete Contract.
B. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and
the extent of the work contemplated. The Contractor shall inspect the site before bidding to verify
the actual conditions involved as no allowance will be made for unforseen conditions. The exact
location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after equipment has been approved by
the Architect and as directed by the Architect. All materials or labor necessary to complete the work
in accordance with the intent of these specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor without
additional charge as if called for in these specifications or shown on the plans.
C. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions,
supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items
with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of
failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the
Contractor's) own expense.
D. This Contractor shall verify all existing conditions that may effect his work including exact location
and size of all plumbing lines, direction of flow, ductwork, existing equipment and connection points.
` ' Any discrepancies from conditions shown on the drawings shall be reported to the Architect before
PM
s
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 010
LUBBOCK, TEXAS GENERAL 15 010-2
bidding and the bid price shall include the cost to correct any discrepancies to provide a complete
and workable system.
E. This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all conditions to insure that the work
as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No material shall be fabricated
or delivered to the job until these conditions have been determined.
F. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during construction, if
required, and no allowances will be made for prefabricated material or on job materials which can
not be used due to actual conditions.
1.6 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these specifications, it has been done, in most
cases, in order to establish a standard. Where the phrase "or equal", or its equivalent is used in
connection with a particular item of material or equipment, the products of others than the particular
manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable, if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution
must be of quality as good as, or better than, the named article. Where the phrase "or equal" or
its equivalent, is not used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment only the
products of the manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable.
B. If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specified by name, he
shall be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred
because of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel piping
requirements resulting from such substitution shall be bome by the Contractor substituting other
equipment.
C. Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the following sections, the Contractor
shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes
to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item
and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submission shall be
accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings, "-
necessary to give full and complete details for the completed installation.
D. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or inferior quality, must be replaced by an acceptable item within two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such rejection.
If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves the right to
notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to fumish. Six (6)
copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and firmly
bound brochures for approval
1.7 PRECEDENCE
A. The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the
following sequence:
1. Soil and waste piping
2. Duct work
3. Cold and hot water piping _
4. Electric wiring
1.8 COOPERATION
A. Eacq contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other contractors to properly
E LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 010
LUBBOCK TEXAS GENERAL 15 010-3
p
coordinate their work, to avoid interference and delays, and arrange all parts of the work so as to
harmonize in service and appearance with all other parts.
1.9 INTERFERENCES
A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must harmonize the work of the different
trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be
avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be
kept as close as possible to walls, ceiling, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of
space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish it must be furnished and installed by the
contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Exact locations of mechanical and electrical outlets or equipment may be varied a reasonable
amount by the Architect before installation without additional cost to the Owner.
C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arranged that all parts will be available for proper
maintenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be
free from any defects. Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have
established as standard, shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their
label.
B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be
responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptance of
the job.
C. Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and
equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during
the day and at the end of each day.
C D. Each Contractor will fumish all necessaryscaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor
9 PP
required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract.
F
E. The workmanship shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordance with
the best practice of the trade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install
all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work.
3.2 PAINTING
FA. Painting will be required as specified in Section 09 920.
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 010
LUBBOCK, TEXAS GENERAL 15 010-4
3.3 TESTING
A. This contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under "Testing" section of
these specifications.
3.4 ELECTRICAL
A. Where automatic controls are called for in the Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves, etc., shall be installed
by the Contractor furnishing the controls, but all wiring necessary shall be done by the Electrical
Contractor. The Contractor furnishing the controls shall furnish a control wiring diagram to the _
Electrical Contractor.
3.5 INSULATION
A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under "Insulation" section of
these specifications.
3.6 DEMOLITION
A. Each contractor shall remove those items shown on the plans to be removed for each respective
trade.
B. All items to be removed or discarded are property of the Owner and shall be stacked as directed
by the Architect or Owner unless notified by the Architect to become property of the Contractor in
which case all items shall be removed from the site.
C. Contractor shall take care not to damage more of the existing facilities than is absolutely necessary.
All concrete to be removed shall be cored or sawed to widths to allow the installation of pipes or
conduits indicated and replaced by Contractor who occasions the work.
3.7 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
3.8 INSTRUCTION MANUALS
A. Furnish four (4) complete bound copies of Instruction Manuals on all operating equipment to Owner.
Manuals: complete with repair instructions, replacement parts list, and complete operating
instructions and wiring diagrams.
3.9 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the Contractor shall run test over a
sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of apparatus, etc., and of
system as a whole to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. See Testing section of the
Specifications.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION
SECTION 15 010
GENERAL
3.10 GUARANTEE
A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship and material against defects for a period of one
(1) year from the date of acceptance, unless specified otherwise in other sections of this
specification.
END OF SECTION
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 020
LUBBOCK TEXAS TESTING 15 020-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide specified testing and testing as required by governing authorities and as herein specified
or as required in other sections of the specifications.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable, clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 15010.
B. Submit a certificate signed by the job superintendent certifying that all tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All testing required under the contract of the plumbing contractor or heating and ventilating and air
conditioning contractor shall be approved by the Engineer before acceptance. Provide the
necessary valves for cutting off existing work not to be tested.
B. The Contractor shall perform the various tests as specified and as required by State and Local
Authorities.
C. Any leaks or defective material found shall be repaired and replaced, and tests shall be repeated
until no further leaks or defects are indicated.
D. All Domestic Hot and Cold Water System: Upon completion of any part of the roughing -in and
r setting of fixtures, the entire hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic
pressure of not less than 100 lbs. per square inch gauge, stand proof tight at this pressure for not
4 less than eight (8) hours. Each particular part of the hot and cold water system shall be tested as
above specified.
3.2 AIR SYSTEMS - AIR DISTRIBUTION TEST AND BALANCE
A. The Contractor shall procure the services of an independent air balance and testing agency,
approved by the Engineer, which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating,
and air conditioning systems, to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment and air
distribution systems as herein specified. All work by this agency shall be done under direct
supervision of a qualified heating and ventilating engineer employed by them. All instruments
t used by this agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If
requested, the tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer responsible for the
project and/or his representative.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 020
LUBBOCK TEXAS TESTING 15 020-2
B. Air balance and testing shall not begin until system has been completed and is in full working order.
The Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment into
full operation and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and
balancing. The Contractor shall submit, within 15 days after receipt of contract, 7 copies of
submittal data for the testing and balancing of the air conditioning, heating, and ventilating systems.
The air balance agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects
of similar size and scope, and shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council
or NEBB. All systems to be tested shall be done in accordance with the latest recommendations
of the Associated Air Balance Council.
C. Test and balance agency shall include an extended warranty of 90 days, after completion of test
and balance work, during which time the Engineer at his discretion may request a recheck, or
resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, or exhaust fan as listed in test report. The agency shall
provide technicians to assist the Engineer in making any tests he may require during this period of
time. The balancing agency shall perform air balance test in the presence of the Engineer's Field
Representative. Air distribution systems shall be balanced to provide the CFM indicated on the
drawings within tolerances listed by the AABC.
D. The Contractor shall award the test and balance contract to the approved agency upon receipt of
this contract to proceed with air conditioning installation, to allow the air balance agency to schedule
this work in cooperation with other trades involved and comply with the completion date.
E. Upon the completion of the air conditioning system, the air balance agency shall perform the tests,
compile the test data, and submit 7 copies of the complete test data to the Contractor for forwarding
to the Engineer for evaluation and approval. The independent air balance agency shall be a
certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council and shall comply with all standards as set
forth by this national organization.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 250
LUBBOCK TEXAS INSULATION 15 250-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This contract includes furnishing and installing all insulation specified herein.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT INSULATION
A. All insulation required under the Heating and Air Conditioning Contract shall be equal to and as
manufactured by the Certain -Teed Saint Gobain Manufacturing Co., or Johns -Manville, and shall
be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations.
B. Insulation: Overhead Heating and Air Conditioning Sheet Metal Ducts - Shall be insulated with 2"
thick fiber glass duct wrap, with aluminum foil Kraft vapor barrier, and shall be secured to ductwork
with an approved adhesive and be sealed and stapled in place, 1-1/2 lb. density.
2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
�* or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
2.3 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD
A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke developed
rating no greater than 50.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
�..3.1 INSULATION
A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
j
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 400
LUBBOCK. TEXAS PLUMBING 15 400-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This contract will include the furnishings and installation of all labor and material necessary to
complete all plumbing as shown on the drawings and as herein specified as follows:
1. Water supply and service.
2. Furnishing and installation of all fixtures as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. —
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittals required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
2.2 FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install all fixtures and products as shown on the drawings and as listed in Fixture
Schedule or the approved equal of other manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
quantity of all fixtures, drains, valves, etc., as shown, as herein specified or as required to make his
installation complete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Cross Connections and Interconnections: No plumbing fixtures, device or piping shall be installed
which will provide a cross connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking
or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system of a soil or waste into the
water supply system.
B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the Plumbing System
all fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings having plumbing connections.
C. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work
and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, valves, and accessories as may
be required to meet such conditions.
t. LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 400
LUBBOCK TEXAS PLUMBING 15 400-2
,., 3.2 STERILIZATION
i A. The entire hot and cold water piping system shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing
not less than fifty (50) parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution
r" and shall be introduced into the system in a manner approved by the Architect. The sterilizing
solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of 24 hours, during which time all
valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. All residual of 4 ppm shall be
produced in all parts of the system at the end of the 24 hour period. After sterilizing, the solution
shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the residual of chlorine content is not greater
than .02 ppm unless otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION
11
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 500
LUBBOCK TEXAS AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15 500-1
7 PART 1 - GENERAL
` 1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the materials, design, installation and testing of the automatic sprinkler systems
as specified. Contractor shall make modifications to the existing fire protection system where shown
in accordance with NFPA 13 for the type facility involved and insure 100% coverage.
B. Contractor shall extend and modify the existing fire protection system to provide 100% coverage of
all modified areas or extend to new areas as shown on the Drawings or required by NFPA.
C. Referenced Standards: The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent
indicated by the reference thereto:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards:
NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 101 - Safety To Life From Fire in Buildings and Structures
NFPA 231 C - Rack Storage of Materials
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication:
Fire Protection Equipment List
3. Factory Mutual System (FM) Publication:
Approved Guide
D. General Requirements: The sprinkler system shall be installed in strict accordance with all
mandatory and recommended provisions of NFPA No. 13 for wet pipe systems.
E. Authority Having Jurisdiction: For interpretation of the NFPA Standard the "Authority Having
Jurisdiction" referred to in the Standard shall be the Architect. The Contractor agrees to accept
such interpretations by the same without additional cost to the Owner.
F. Qualification of the Contractor: The Fire Protection System shall be installed by an experienced firm
regularly engaged in the installation and design of automatic sprinkler systems. The Contractor
shall have a "Certificate of Registration" or proof of qualifications as required by the State or the
Architect. The design of the Fire Protection System shall be accomplished by a Fire Protection
Engineer and the design shall take into consideration both the existing system and the new system.
G. Materials and Equipment List and Approval: The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for
approval a complete list of all materials, equipment and accessories proposed for installation, in
compliance with the drawings and specifications. This list shall include catalog identification
numbers, drawings, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data and material necessary to define
completely all components of the work. No consideration will be given to partial list submitted from
time to time. Approval of materials and equipment will be based on manufacturer's published data,
and will be tentative, subject to submission and approval of complete shop drawings.
H. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings will be submitted at one time to demonstrate that pertinent items of equipment
{ have been properly coordinated and will function properly with each other. No installation work
will be permitted prior to approval of complete shop drawings.
2. Submittal drawings shall be accurately drawn on blank mylar or vellum sheets. Drawings shall
be identical in size, scales, and orientation as the contract drawings, and conform to the
requirements established for working plans by NFPA No. 13.
3. if departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of
such departures, including changes in related portions of the project and the reasons, therefore,
shall be submitted with the shop drawings and hydraulic calculations. Approved departures
shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 500
LUBBOCK. TEXAS AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15 500-2
4. All calculations shall be submitted for approval showing piping designs, water supplies,
available pressures, residual pressures, etc. as required by NFPA for hydraulic designs.
I. Record Drawings: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise the original shop
drawings to agree with the construction as actually accomplished. These drawings shall be
delivered to the Architect.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General
Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.
1.3 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All material and equipment shall be new and the current standard products of the manufacturer.
Where two or more items of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall
be exact duplicates, produced by one manufacturer. However, component parts need not be
products of the same manufacturer.
2. All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for systems of the type
indicated on the drawings, and conform to the requirements of NFPA No. 13.
B. Materials and Equipment:
1. Contractor shall replace any damaged heads with new, and all new heads installed shall match
the existing.
2. Those heads in hard ceilings with missing covers shall be replaced with new heads and covers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Piping material, including valves and fittings shall be delivered to the site in a clean condition and
protected against entry of foreign material.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Prior to erection the interior or all piping shall be cleaned of all metal cuttings, loose scale, or other
foreign materials. At the discretion of the Architect, non -welded piping and welded piping with
backing rings may require brush cleaning as above. After erection and prior to testing, all valves,
caps, and plugs at all low points in the system shall be opened and the system thoroughly flushed
with water.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 500
LUBBOCK TEXAS AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15 500-3
3.3 JOINTS
A. Joints shall be the threaded, flanged, welded, or grooved. Shop welded joints in accordance with
NFPA No. 13 will be permitted.
1. Threaded Joints: Threads shall be concentric with the outside of the pipe and shall conform
to ANSI B2.1. Threaded joints shall be made tight with an approved thread joint compound or
tape. Joint compound shall be applied lightly but sufficiently to cover male threads only.
Leaking joints shall not be repaired by peaning or packing.
2. Cutting: Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements shown on the drawings and to suit field
r. conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing. All cuts shall
be reamed to remove fins and burrs.
i
3.4 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
A. Special supports and hangers shall be as detailed and located on drawings. Supports and hangers
not detailed on drawings shall be an approved type, installed in accordance with NFPA No. 13.
Ring hangers shall be of the adjustable type. Offsets in hanger rods will not be acceptable.
3.5 TESTS
A. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall subject the system
to the tests required by NFPA No. 13 and furnish the Architect with a test certificate signed by
official of local fire department.
K�ri'I\:t:7T�i�11►1�Ztl�l1_:71�t1��
A. All materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from date of completion to be
free of defects.
END OF SECTION
� F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 840
LUBBOCK TEXAS DUCTWORK 15 840-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishings of all material and
labor as required for the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as
herein specified.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General
Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 15010.
rr B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
b
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
F2.1 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK (Low Velocity -Low Pressure)
A. Sheet metal duct work shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets, suitable for low velocity
systems as hereinafter specified. Unless otherwise approved, ducts shall conform accurately to the
dimensions indicated and shall be straight and smooth on the inside, with joints neatly finished.
Ducts shall be securely attached on the framing in the building and the method of anchoring and/or
fastening shall be as hereinafter specified as to be completely free from vibration under all
conditions of operation. Supports shall be attached only to structural framing members, suitable
intermediate metal framing shall be provided and installed. All duct systems shall be fabricated and
installed in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards for Low Velocity Duct.
B. Duct Construction
1.
Curved elbows shall have a centerline radius not less than 1-1/2 times the width or diameter
of the duct.
2.
Joints for low velocity ducts shall be made substantially air tight„ and no dust marks from air
leaks shall show at duct joints, or connections to grilles, registers, and diffusers.
3.
Laps at the joints for low velocity system shall be made in the direction of air flow. Button
punch or bolt connections In standing seams shall be spaced at fixed center not greater than
t
6-inches. Horizontal locks and seams of the type known as Button Punch Snap Lock may be
used in lieu of Pittsburg Lack.
4.
Transformations shall be made with sides pitched not to exceed a maximum of 20 degrees, 40
degrees included angle, for diverging air flow and 30 degrees, 60 degrees included angle, for
converging air flow, or as indicated on the drawings.
5.
Square elbows, fittings and branch take -offs for low velocity shall be designed, constructed and
installed as recommended in Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors
Association, Duct Manual, Sections 1 and 2.
r.
6.
Other details of duct construction, access doors, hangers, anchors and supports, duct joints,
volume dampers, etc., shall be specified and/or indicated on the drawings. Installation of items
f
l
not shown in detail or not covered by detailed specifications shall be as set forth in the Duct
Manual, Section 1 - Low Velocity Systems, of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National
Contractors Association.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 840
LUBBOCK. TEXAS DUCTWORK 15 840-2
7. Low -velocity ducts and stiffeners shall be constructed of galvanized steel of thickness and
fabrication indicated in Section 1, Low Velocity System, SMACNA Duct Manual for Rectangular
ducts.
8. All joints for ducts located outside the building shall be sealed with 50/50 liquid solder.
C. Splitter and Dampers: Dampers shall have accessible operating mechanism, and where operators
occur in finished portions of the building, operators shall be chromium plated with all exposed edges
rounded. Splitter dampers shall be operated by quadrant operators or 3/16-inch rod brought through
the side of the duct with locking setscrews and bushings. Manual volume control dampers shall be
operated by locking -type and quadrant operator. Dampers and splitters shall be two gages heavier
than duct in which installed.
D. Air deflectors shall be provided in all square elbows, duct -mounted supply outlet, takeoff or
extension collars to supply outlets, and tap -in branch -takeoff connections. Air deflectors shall be
factory -fabricated and factory -or field -assembled units consisting of curved turning vanes or louver
blades for uniform air distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence and pressure
loss. Square elbows shall be provided with curved vanes.
E. Duct supports shall be not less than two 1-inch by 1/16-inch thick galvanized strap -iron hangers
spaced one on each side of duct in accordance with SMACNA Duct Manual.
2.2 ROUND AND OVAL SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
A. All duct and fittings shall be manufactured by a company who has had as its principal business, the
manufacture of spiral pipe and welded fittings for at least ten (10) years. Duct shall be spirally
wound.
B. All ductwork will be manufactured by the same firm to assure tight fit of all ductwork and
components. The Contractor shall submit the name of the manufacture of the ductwork and fittings.
C. Installation manuals shall be included by the Contractor with his submittals. These manuals shall
provide detailed instruction on:
Assembly
Joint Sealing
Erection
Reinforcement of Flat -Oval Duct
System Pressure Testing for Leaks
D. Sheet Metal Gauges and Materials shall be in accordance with SMACNA requirements for spiral
duct.
1. Round single wall pipe shall be manufactured of galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-67
Standards.
E. The spiral pipe shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate any leakage under the pressures
for which this system has been designed.
F. Longitudinal seam duct shall have a fusion welded butt seam.
G. All fittings are to have continuous welds along all seams. All divided flow fittings are to be
manufactured as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded into spiral duct sections.
H. All 90 deg. tees and 45 deg. laterals (wyes) up to and including 12" diameter tap size shall have
a radiused entrance into the tap, produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free
of weld build-up, buns, or irregularities. 14" and larger shall be rolled edge.
E
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 840
LUBBOCK. TEXAS DUCTWORK 15 840-3
I. Elbows in diameters 3" through 8" shall be two section stamped elbows. All other elbows shall be
gored construction with all seams continuous -welded. Elbows shall be fabricated to a center -line
radius of 1.5 times the cross-section diameter.
J. Where it is necessary to use 2-piece mitered elbows, they shall have turning vanes in accordance
with the following schedule:
Diameter Number of Vanes
3" thru 9" 2
10" thru 14" 3
�• 15" thru 19" 4
t
20" and over 5
K. The leading edge of all vanes in ducts over 20" diameter shall be hemmed with 1/2" fold -back.
Turning vanes in ducts over 24" shall be reinforced by rods or sectional construction to limit
unsupported length to 24". Vanes shall be minimum of 20 gauge.
L. The reduction of divided flow fittings shall be a conical spun section in the thirty-six common
reductions in sizes 4" through 22".
M. Spun bellmouth connections are to be used at each round take -off from the plenum.
N. Galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding shall be coated with corrosion resistant
aluminum paint.
O. Couplings for round ducts shall be as follows:
1. Pipe -to -pipe joints in diameters to 50" shall be
by the use of sleeve couplings, reinforced by rolled beads.
2. Pipe -to -fitting joints in diameters to 50" are by slip -fit of projecting collar of the fitting into the
pipe.
3. Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar is 2" for diameters through 9" and 4" for
diameters 10" and up.
4. Pipe -to -pipe and pipe -to -fitting connections in diameters above 50" are made by angle ring
flanges. Connections 51" and up are made by the loose ring "Van Stone" flange. A one-half
inch flange is provided by the body ends of duct sections and fittings to act as a gasketing
surface for sealing. The angle ring is a rolled, welded ring 2" x 2" x 3/16".
S. Bolt hole spacing for angle rings shall not exceed 6".
6. If duct sections in diameters greater than 50" are supplied in lengths greater than 4' lengths,
one angle ring must be welded to duct on 4' centers. Welding can be an intermittent weld of
1"in4".
2.3 FIBER DUCTWORK
4
A. Fiber ductwork will not be used on this job anywhere.
2.4 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Furnish and install flexible connections of 30 ounce woven glass fabric from discharge and return
openings of equipment to ductwork. The flexible connections shall be of a type that is airtight, equal
to Ventfabrics "Ventglas", and shall be installed in such a manner that the air flow is not restricted
nor the connection leaks air. At least 1" slack shall be allowed in connection to insure that no
vibration is transmitted from fans to ductwork.
i
B. Fabric connections shall be UL approved.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 840
LUBBOCK, TEXAS DUCTWORK 15 840-4
2.5 ACCESS DOORS
A. Access doors in ductwork shall be 2" smaller in height than duct dimensions and 12" wide and
located in accessible locations on both sides of all fire and smoke dampers. Doors in vertical
position shall be equal to Ventlok insulated type, complete with all hinges, hardware and air seal.
Doors in horizontal position shall be job built complete with sash lock, two (2) per side, and rubber
air seal, all as manufactured by Ventlok, or approved equal.
2.6 ZONE VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Volume control dampers shall be furnished and installed where shown on the drawings for all air
unit zone ducts with locking operator installed on bottom side of ducts.
B. Dampers shall be the opposed blade type with comer bracing for stiffening as manufactured by
Young Regulator Co., Model No. 817, or approved equal, of size shown on the drawings.
2.7 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fire dampers shall be installed where shown on the drawings and/or where any duct passes through
a fire partition. Access doors, as specified elsewhere, shall be installed at each fire damper. Fire
dampers shall be installed in center of walls, and shall be rated for 1-1/2 hours. Dampers shall
extend 3" beyond each side of wall to receive restraining angles.
B. All fire dampers shall be installed bearing the label and inspection service of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. The installation shall be in accordance with the mounting instructions provided
by the manufacturer describing the UL approved installation procedures with restraining angles both
sides of wall or as detailed on the drawings, whichever is more stringent.
C. The dampers shall be of all welded construction. Crimping and tabs are not acceptable substitutes
for welding.
D. Dampers shall be of the type that the damper, in full open position, is 100% out of the air stream.
Low velocity rectangular ducts shall be same as required for high -velocity ducts.
E. Inlet and outlet of dampers shall be factory equipped with 2-1/2" deep duct collars for duct
connections.
F. Fire dampers shall be Prefco Model type SF-LPB, frame type "C", or approved equal.
2.8 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Fire and smoke dampers shall be installed where shown on the drawings and/or where any duct
passes through a fire smoke partition. Access doors, as specified elsewhere, shall be installed at
each damper location. Dampers shall be installed in center of walls, and shall be rated for 1-1/2
hours. Dampers shall extend 3" beyond each side of wall to receive restraining angles.
B. All fire dampers shall be installed bearing the label and inspection service of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. The installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 90A and the mounting
instructions provided by the manufacturer describing the UL approved installation procedures with
restraining angles both sides of wall or as detailed on the drawings, whichever is more stringent.
C. Dampers shall be of the type that the damper, in full open position, is 100% out of the air stream.
Low velocity rectangular ducts shall be same as required for high -velocity ducts.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 840
LUBBOCK TEXAS DUCtWORK 15 840-5
D. Inlet and outlet of dampers shall be factory equipped with 2-1/2" deep duct collars for duct
connections.
E. Multiple Blade Damper: Fabricate with 16 gauge galvanized steel frame and blades, oil -impregnated
bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x
1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and
1/2 inch actuator shaft.
F. Operators: UL listed and labelled spring return. Locate damper operator on exterior of duct and
link to damper operating shaft.
G. Dampers shall be curtain type, closing upon actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel
blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices
to ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally.
H. Dampers shall be Ruskin FSD-37, (Class 1), or equal with TS150 firestat. Provide duct mounted
smoke detector and duct access door.
2.9 CONTROL
A. All smoke and combination fire smoke dampers shall be connected to the fire alarm system to
initiate an alarm on the detection of smoke.
B. Contractor shall furnish and install all duct mounted smoke detectors as required and each damper
shall have the capability to be reset from the fire alarm panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All duct systems shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall provide a complete and
working system.
B. Hangers for ductwork shall be galvanized steel straps and/or electro-plated zinc or hot -dipped
galvanized after threading, threaded rods, minimum of 3/8" diameter.
C. Hangers shall be spaced a maximum of 8'-0" on center.
D. When threaded hanger rods are used, bearing plate shall be on channel and/or angle, hot -dipped
galvanized after cutting, and drilling of hanger rod holes.
E. Hanger rods shall be secured to channels and/or angle by galvanized washer, nut, and locket nut.
Hanger rods shall be suspended from super -structure.
3.2 CLEANING
A. After installation is complete, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Filters shall be cleaned
and/or replaced with new. Damaged paint shall be sanded and touched -up. All damaged insulation
shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 870
LUBBOCK TEXAS GRILLES REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15 870-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
R A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes the! furnishing of all labor and
R materials as required for the installation of a complete air diffusing system as shown on the
drawings, and as hereinafter specified. All side wall grilles, supply and returns, shall comply with
!" NFPA Standard No. 90A.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
F
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SIDE WALL RETURN AIR GRILLES
A. All side wall return air grilles shall be with beaded frames and removable cores. Cores shall be a
minimum of 86% free area and shall conform to NFPA Standard No. 90A.
2.2 CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSERS
A. Ceiling supply diffusers, except where shown on the drawings and/or specified, shall be all fully
adjustable, all as shown on the drawings. All diffusers shall be equipped with deflectrols and
opposed blade volume controls operated from the face of the diffusers and deflectrols.
2.3 CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLES
A. Ceiling return air grilles shall be all as shown on the drawings. All ceiling return air grilles shall be
equipped with removable cores.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Side wall supply registers, side wall returns and side wall exhaust grilles shall be electroplated zinc
core and prime coat frame. Other finishes shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GUARANTEE
A. This Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a written factory guarantee with submittal data, that all
registers and diffusers will perform as follows:
1. Diffusers and registers shall diffuse air uniformly throughout the conditioned space with a 25
deg. F. temperature differential between average room temperature and supply air temperature.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 15 870 _
LUBBOCK TEXAS GRILLES REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15 870-2
The velocities in the 5' occupancy zone, measured no closer than 6" from any wall surface,
shall not exceed 30 FPM at 2 deg. F., 50 FPM at 1-1/2 deg. F., or 75 FPM at 1 degree F.
temperature differential, with a minimum average room temperature of 75 deg. F.
2. Maximum decibel rating of any side wall register shall not exceed 30 db at a range of 5' in front
of the register and at a maximum register face velocity of 600 FPM.
B. If factory guarantee is not received, equipment will not be approved.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 010
LUBBOCK TEXAS GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16 010-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
B. Furnish all labor, materials, service, equipment and appliances required to complete the installation
of the complete electrical system in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings.
C. Electrical Division Index:
16010 - General Electrical Provisions
16110 - Raceways
16120 - Conductors
16130 - Boxes and Fittings
16134 - Panelboards
16140 - Wiring Devices
16170 - Switches and Fuses
16450 - Grounding
16460 - Dry -Type Transformers
16500 - Lighting
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all electrical and related
work as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified as follows:
1. Installation of secondary services as shown on the drawings.
2. From starting point connect all panelboards, meters, power outlets, convenience outlets,
switches and controls.
3. Conduits, pull wires, junction boxes for Owner furnished equipment.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATOR AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installations, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the
applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code
(NESC), and the terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful
jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules,
regulations and authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge to the Owner.
B. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): All materials, appliances, equipment or devices shall conform to
the applicable standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. The label of, or listing by, UL is
required.
C. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and
standards of the following organizations shall apply: American Society of Testing and Materials
(ASTM), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Insulated Power Cable Engineers
Association (IPCEA), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Material List: As soon as possible after contract award and before material is ordered, the
Contractor shall submit for approval a list of all proposed material and equipment, indicating
manufacturer's name and general description.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 010
LUBBOCK, TEXAS GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16 010-2
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval in accordance with the requirements contained in the SPECIAL
PROVISIONS, a minimum of six (6) copies of all shop drawings after the material list has been
approved and prior to ordering. Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical services, control
diagrams, electrical characteristics of special nature or critical to the installation, and pertinent data
required for installation. Indicate in the transmittal that submittal has been reviewed and accepted
and all contract deviations identified. In addition to, but not limited to, specific references or
requests, submit shop drawings for the following applicable items: Switchboards, Panelboards,
Lighting Fixtures, Transformers, Alarm Systems, Primary Cable, Emergency Battery Units, Fire
Alarm.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on
information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical
requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make all
adjustments to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required
to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The complete
responsibility and costs or such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this
specification under which the equipment is furnished.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer.
B. Where no specific material, apparatus, or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by
a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and
meets the approval of the Engineer.
C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design.
D. Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function intended at an altitude of the
project site.
E. Materials and Equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements
specified below. Other materials and equipment shall be as specified elsewhere herein and as
shown on the drawings, and shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of such products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in a first class
workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an
orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall
check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment or material is to be installed, removed or
relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work
signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions.
I
i LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 010
LUBBOCK TEXAS GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16 010-3
3.2 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
A. Furnish and install all temporary electrical facilities required for construction and safety operations.
No part of the permanent electrical systems or the existing electrical system may be used for
temporary service unless approved by the Engineer.
3.3 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services, and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom from
grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances, and devices
shall be operated under load conditions.
B. After the interior -wiring system installation is complete and at such time as the Engineer may direct,
conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices, and
equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original
characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications.
C. Prior to acceptance or beneficial occupancy, establish nominal building power loads and record
voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these readings make final adjustments of tap
changers on all transformers in the building electrical system to comply with specifications and
equipment installed.
D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to
prove acceptability.
E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. The Exchange will fumish the necessary electric
power.
3.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
A. Instructions: Without additional charge to the Owner, furnish competent instruction to the Engineer
in the care, adjustment and operation of all parts of the electrical equipment and systems.
B. Manuals: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver to the Architect two (2) sets of complete
operating and maintenance manuals for the systems and major equipment installed. Include catalog
data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves and rating data, spare parts lists, and
manufacturer's operating and maintenance data.
C. Other: The above requirements are in addition to specific instructions and manuals specified for
individual systems or equipment.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer, and remote control device to
identify each item with its respective service. Marking may be stencilled on the enclosure or
adjacent surface in utility areas. Provide nameplates in finished area.
B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8 inch high where specified or noted.
In general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed plastic adhesive tape
is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device plate.
C. Identify panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, and cabinets by nameplates with
descriptions indicated on the drawings together with indication of location of the feeder overcurrent
protection. Install on inside of hinged doors of panelboards and cabinets.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 010
LUBBOCK, TEXAS GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16 010-4
3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform excavation, backfilling and repaving required for work under this Division In accordance with
DIVISION 2, SITE WORK. In general, backfill and tamp with compaction at least equal to that of
the surrounding area.
3.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Provide record drawings showing the "as -built" condition of all electrical work. Information shall
include but not be limited to indicating:
1. All floor outlets.
2. Underfloor duct and all connections to duct system.
3. All conduit runs including size installed.
4. All stub -up locations of conduits in floor routed up columns or walls.
5. Locations and sizes of all junction and pull boxes.
B. This drawing shall be a mylar sepia of the power plans.
3.8 WORKMANSHIP
A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical
appearance upon completion. All mechanics shall be capable experienced electricians.
B. Panels and cutout boxes shall be properly supported from the building construction. Boxes shall
be set plumb and at height best suited for adequate operation. Wring troughs and barriers shall
be as required by the National Electric Code as amended to date.
C. Symbols on drawings are approximately correct, but care shall be taken that all fixture outlets are
symmetrical on spaces, ceiling panels, bays or rooms, and all switch outlets are on the strike side
of doors.
D. Outlets may be varied slightly in location either horizontally or vertically by the Owner before
installation. Outlets for special equipment shall be located and verified on the job before final
rough -in is made.
E. Unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed, locate outlet boxes as follows: (Dimensions are
from bottom of box to floor.)
Switches
Convenience Outlets
Telephone Outlets
Thermostats
Panelboards
Power Outlets
Fire Alarm Pull Stations
Fire Alarm Indicating Devices
4'-0" or as noted
V-6" or as noted
1'-6" or as noted
48" or as noted
6'-0" from top of floor
1'-6" or as noted
48" or as noted
80" or as noted
F. All work shall be concealed, and panels, boxes, etc., shall be flush type, unless otherwise noted on _
the drawings. All conduits and wiring shall be run from overhead unless otherwise noted. If walls
do not extend to ceilings, run conduit in slabs. Conduit in shop areas may be run exposed,
threaded through roof joist.
G. All flush outlet boxes shall be set so that edge of cover comes flush with finished surface. Outlet
boxes shall be of a suitable size and construction to serve the purpose properly.
P
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 010
r" LUBBOCK TEXAS GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16 010-5
r
H. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are actually required.
I. Outlet boxes shall be provided in all cases with proper supports for fixtures.
J. All wires shall be polarized. No joints or taps in feeders will be permitted under any condition.
K. Joints in branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide, and shall then consist of one
(1) through circuit, to which shall be spliced the branch from this circuit.
L. Wire and cable connectors shall be solderless, mechanical type. Connectors for conductors #8
AWG and smaller shall be Buchanan Electrical Products copper squeeze -on type with molded
rubber or vinyl cap, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. Scotchlock, or Ideal Industries
Super -Nut spring connector with molded vinyl cap.
M. Conduits shall be of such size and shalt be so installed that the required conductors may be drawn
in without injury or excessive stain. Powdered soapstone only may be used as a lubricant where
necessary. Sizes of conduits shall be in accordance with National Code tables. Flexible metal
conduit may be used for final connections to motors, etc., but shall not be over 48" in total length
from outlet box to motor. Waterproof flexible conduit may be used in exterior locations. Connectors
for conductors larger than #8 AWG shall be mechanical bolted type, insulated with clamp -on molded
covers or vinyl plastic tape. The manufacturer shall be O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Co., or Bumdy
Engineering Company. Flexible conduit smaller than 1/2" diameter shall not be permitted to be
used.
N. Where conduits enter boxes they shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts and bushings.
Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction.
O. Conduits, except those which are vertical for their entire length, and except conduits connecting
ceiling outlets together, shall have a drag consisting of a number of tight felting rubber washers
drawn through before wires are pulled in.
END OF SECTION
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 110
r LUBBOCK TEXAS RACEWAYS 16110-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENT
A. General Provision of the Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division
1 General Requirements apply.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
B. Grounding - Section 16450
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated
or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel zinc -coated on the outside and
either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or
coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside.
D. Flexible Conduit: Commercial Greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate grounding bond wire
installed in the conduit in addition to other wires. No flexible conduit shall be installed over 2' in
length.
E. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing with extruded liquid -tight PVC outer
jacket and a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. Where
a separate grounding conductor is installed in the conduit, bonding conductor in the conductor in
the convolutions may be omitted.
F. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size 1/2 inch except where specifically approved for equipment
connections. Sizes shall be as noted on the drawings and where not noted sizes shall be as
required by the NEC.
G. Nonmetallic Multi -Channel Raceway: Walker-Wiremold 5500 Series.
2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC, and EMT Fittings: Iron or steel only. Cast fittings will not be allowed.
B. Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either steel or malleable iron only, with insulated
throats, and shall be of one of the following types:
1. Wedge and screw type with angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the condult.
2. Squeeze or clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and
clamped by one or more screws.
3. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit convolutions.
r
C. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic
compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Gland shall be either steel or malleable iron only with
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 110
LUBBOCK, TEXAS RACEWAYS 16 110-2
insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without "O" ring seal. Each
connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the
outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected.
D. Connectors and Couplings: Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel conduit or IMC
permitted. Set screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not permitted. Steel set screw
connectors and couplings permitted for special conditions when approved. EMT couplings and
connectors either steel or malleable iron only, "Concrete -tight" or "Rain -tight", and either the gland
and ring compression type or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. Connectors to have
insulated throats. EMT fittings using set screws or indentations of a means of attachment not
permitted.
E. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of
the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC, and rigid aluminum conduit larger than
1/2 inch size.
F. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction on
opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be
subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings shall
be hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring.
G. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits
and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water
vapor shall be of the continuous drain type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, or EMT unless otherwise specified. Aluminum conduit
is not permitted.
B. EMT: Not permitted underground nor embedded in concrete.
C. Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit for lights, motor or equipment connections and then only to
the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Install flexible conduit connections at all
resilient -mounted equipment. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp locations
and for connections to wet -pipe mechanical systems. All flexible conduit in kitchen, food
preparation, walk-ins, and dishwashing locations shall be liquid -tight.
D. Conduit in Concrete: Rigid steel conduit, or rigid non-metallic conduit may be embedded in concrete
providing the outside diameter does not exceed one-third the thickness of the concrete slab, wall,
or beam, is located entirely within the center third of the member, and lateral spacing of conduits
is not less than three diameters.
E. Steel Conduit in Ground: Rigid steel conduit, that is not completely encased in concrete but is in
contact with ground or on a vapor barrier, shall be wrapped in Scotchap 51 half -lapped, or shall
have an additional outside factory coating of polyvinyl chloride with a minimum coat thickness of 20
mils. Other PVC of Phenolic resin -epoxy coating material which is equally flexible and chemically
resistant may be used providing approval by the Engineer is obtained prior to installation.
F. Exposed Conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at right angles to the lines of the
building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard elbows, screw jointed
conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of standard elbows.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 110
LUBBOCK TEXAS RACEWAYS 16 110-3
G. Concealed Conduits: Install conduit systems concealed where possible unless otherwise noted.
Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and where specifically
approved by the Engineer. Install concealed conduit systems in as direct lines as possible.
H. Exterior Underground Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, wrapped as above, shall be used for
all circuits outside the building slab. Conduit shall be buried a minimum of 2'-6" below finished
grade. Concrete encased Schedule 40 PVC conduit may also be used for exterior underground
feeders.
1. Conduit Bends: In any conduit or EMT run the number of quarter bends or equivalent between
terminations at cabinets or boxes shall not exceed four (4) bends for conduits up to 1-1/4 inch, three
(3) bends for 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch conduits, and two (2) bends for 3- to 4-inch conduits. Conduits run
between cabinets or boxes shall not exceed 100 feet for straight runs nor 100 feet for runs with
maximum number of bends. Bends in telephone feeder conduits shall be long -radius.
Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT terminating in the bottoms of boxes
or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to installation of conductors.
K. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits pass from warm to cold
locations, and where otherwise indicated.
L. Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit sleeves not
used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing through walls. Sleeves
that are used shall be caulked tight with lead yam.
3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT as required by the National
Electrical Code, including runs above suspended ceilings. In suspended ceiling construction, only
lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. No supports shall
be permitted from metal roof decks.
B. Straps: Install one -hole pipe straps on conduits 1-1/2 inch or smaller. Install individual pipe hangers
for conduits larger than 1-1/2 inch. Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods may be used in dry
locations in lieu of pipe straps.
C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers where two or more horizontal conduits or EMT run
parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger member
by a U- bolt, one -hole strap or other specially designed and approved fastener.
D. Hanger Rods: Install 3/16 inch diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel fasteners,
clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for The support of any conduit,
EMT or light fixtures in open ceiling areas.
E. Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts,
to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts.
Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Power -driven fasteners may be used to attach pipe
straps and hanger rods to concrete where approved by the Engineer.
t F. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly secured by means of pipe clamps, hangers,
etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO Products, Inc. Wire wrapped around conduits and
supporting members will not be acceptable.
t.
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 110
LUBBOCK, TEXAS RACEWAYS 16 110-4
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Contractor shall furnish as -built drawings showing routing and/or terminations of all conduit and
boxes run into floor and from underfloor into wall or above ceiling terminations.
3.4 CLOSING OF OPENINGS
A. Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage of conduits
or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts, such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such
openings, shall be filled or closed in a manner approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 120
LUBBOCK TEXAS CONDUCTORS 16120-1
4
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
B. Grounding - Section 16450
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS)
A. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Copper conductors with
600 volt insulation. Stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors shall
not be permitted.
B. Insulation: Type THHN insulation minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings.
Type THHN minimum or Type XHHW filled cross -linked polyethylene 90 deg. C thermosetting
insulation for conductors No. 8 or larger. 90 deg. C minimum insulation within fixture wireways of
fluorescent fixtures, Type RF-2 or TF commercial fixture wire, No. 16 AWG may be used for Class
2 remote control and signal circuits.
C. Size: No. 12 AWG minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Not less than
NEC requirements for the system to be installed. Conductors for trench circuits of 120 volts, or
more than 100 feet long from panel to load center, shall be No. 10 AWG. Class 1 remote control
and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control
and signal circuit conductors shall be not less than No. 16 AWG. If the Contractor furnishes other
than specified equipment, it shall be his responsibility to furnish proper size conduit and conductors
as required without additional cost to the Owner.
D. Conductors shall be color coded as follows:
120/208V
Phase A
Black
Phase B
Red
Phase C
Blue
Neutral
White
Ground
Green
Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductor. Conductors No. 12 and
10 shall be solid color compound for the entire length. Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 may be
color coded at each termination and in each box or enclosure with 6 inches of half -lapped 3/4 inch
pressure -sensitive, plastic tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound.
2.2 COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC CABLE
r
A. Foil shielded twisted pair cable shall be stranded equal to Belden "Belfoii", sized as required.
fr
l:
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 120
LUBBOCK TEXAS CONDUCTORS 16120-2
B. Unless otherwise noted, co -axial cable shall be Belden RG-59, 20 AWG.
C. As required or specified in the section of these specifications specifying the equipment. Cable shall
be continuous from backboards or panels to outlets or other termination points without splices. _
2.3 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual conductor and tightens due to weight of the
cable shall be used for cables without metallic sheath. Basket weave type supports shall be used
for cables with metallic sheath.
2.4 CONNECTORS AND LUGS
A. For Copper Conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch-Lok or T&B Sta-Kon compression or indent
type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps.
B. For Copper Conductors Larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hex screw, or bolt -type pressure
connectors, properly taped or insulated.
2.5 TAPE
A. Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum insulation resistance,
oil -resistant vinyl backing, oil -resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of supporting combustion per
ASTM D-568 Test Method B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS)
A. Measure the insulating resistance of service entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors, and
service ground. Measurements shall be taken between conductors and between conductors and
ground. Resistance shall be 1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without
branch circuit loads. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Engineer, and shall be
in accordance with the applicable IPCEA Standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish
all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in presence of the
Engineer. Submit written reports of the tests and results shall be furnished to the Engineer.
3.2 SPLICES (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures. Conductor lengths shall be continuous from
termination to termination without splices unless approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 130
r" LUBBOCK TEXAS BOXES AND FITTINGS 16 130-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
B. Grounding - Section 16450
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Construction: Zino -coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes of a class to satisfy the condition
at each outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required. Knockout type with knockouts
removed only where necessary to accommodate the conduit entering. Square comered, straight
sided gang boxes, 4 inch octagon concrete rings and 4 inch octagon hung ceiling boxes with bars
may be folded type; one-piece deep -drawn type for all other boxes.
B. Size: To accommodate the required number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices in accordance
with NEC requirements, but not smaller than size shown or specified. Standard concrete type boxes
not to exceed 6 inches deep except where necessary to permit entrance of conduits into sides of
boxes without interference with reinforcing bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the
device or application intended.
C. Fixture Studs: 318 inch malleable -iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting fixtures and
r interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop cards.
D. Exposed: Screw -joint type, with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to the weather.
E. Tile Boxes: Rectangular in shape with square corners and straight sides for receptacles and
switches mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick stone or wood
walls. Install without plaster rings.
F. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or specified, not less
than 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep for signal devices, 4-11/16 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep
for two devices and muttigang boxes for more than two devices. Boxes for switches and
receptacles on unfinished walls may be screw joint type with covers to fit the devices.
G. Wall -Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, unless
otherwise noted on the drawings.
H. Light Fixture Boxes: 4 inch diameter by 1-1/2 inch deep minimum for ceiling and interior bracket
fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have 3 inch diameter
openings. Screw joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with exposed
conduits.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 130
LUBBOCK, TEXAS BOXES AND FITTINGS 16 130-2
Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green equipment
ground conductor, for serving motors, lighting fixtures, or receptacles. Grounding terminal shall be
green -colored washer -in -hand machine screw or grounding bushing.
2.2 PULL BOXES
A. Minimum NEC requirements unless larger box is noted. Pull boxes with internal volume not more
than 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for outlet boxes with blank covers. Pull boxes with
internal volume over 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for cabinets except covers shall be same
thickness as box and shall have corrosion -resistant screws or bolt attachments.
2.3 FLOOR BOXES
A. Heavy-duty, cast, adjustable type suitable for the device or application indicated, unless noted.
Provide carpet flanges in carpeted area. Each telephone outlet shall consist of a horizontal cast
aluminum housing with a one inch bushed side opening. Outlets shall have provisions to
accommodate a ten wire telephone terminal block. Gaskets shall be used to insure proper
installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, outlet boxes shall be flush
mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with the finished wall or
ceiling line, or, if installed in walls and ceilings of incombustible construction, not more than 1/4 inch
back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of devices vertical, unless otherwise specified.
Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with plaster covers. A multiple of box
extensions and/or covers will not be permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with
suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood,
expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work.
B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall -mounted outlet box shall be construed to mean
the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile,
block, or brick construction mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint in the mounting height
indicated. Verify with Architect.
C. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount so the
centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. Install outlet boxes near doors
or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on
architectural drawings, unless other locations are approved by the Architect.
3.2 PULL BOXES
A. Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for maximum lengths of
conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under Conduit and Fittings.
3.3 FLOOR BOXES
A. Install level with top covers adjusted flush with finished floor or floor tile.
3.4 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS
A. Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay -in or accessible ceilings shall be connected with minimum
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 130
LUBBOCK TEXAS BOXES AND FITTINGS 16 130-3
1/2 inch flexible metallic conduit, 4 to 6 feet long, with grounding provided. Flexible conduit shall
not be used as the ground.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all exposed junction and pull boxes according to the system and voltage carried by means
of painted -on stencils or labels, with legible letters and contrasting colors and without abbreviations.
In general, use yellow color. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 9 - Finishes.
END OF SECTION
CLMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 134
r LUBBOCK TEXAS PANELBOARDS 16134-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, descriptive literature, and complete
description of the frame size, trip setting, class, and interrupting rating of all overcurrent devices.
Identify available spaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install at locations as shown on the drawings approved panelboards
of a type indicated and specified herein.
B. Panels identified on the drawings for use as service equipment shall be so labeled.
C. Panelboards shall comply with the applicable sections of UL, NEC and NEMA.
D. Accepted manufacturers shall be Westinghouse, General Electric, and ITE. All other manufacturers
must submit substitution proposals for approval at least 7 days prior to the scheduled bid date.
2.2 INTERIORS
A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled with bolt -on devices. They shall be designed such
that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without
removing the main bus connectors.
B. Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels
with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices.
Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection.
C. Main bus bars shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature
rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees
C maximum.
D. A copper ground bus shall be included in all panels.
2.3 BOXES
A. Boxes shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space
in accordance with the National Electric Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel
are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 134 _
LUBBOCK, TEXAS PANELBOARDS 16 134-2
the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall
be provided.
B. Boxes shall be provided with removable blank ends.
2.4 TRIMS
A. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door over all circuit -"
breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a
semi -flush cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary
fasteners. —
B. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible.
C. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed and a finish coat of gray ANSI 61
paint applied.
D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 of
an inch on all sides.
E. A directory card with clear plastic cover shall be supplied mounted on the inside of each door.
F. Provide an engraved nameplate for each panel section.
2.5 PANELBOARD RATINGS
A. Panelboards rated 240 VAC or less shall have short circuit ratings as shown on the drawings or as
herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.
B. Breakers shall be a minimum of 100 ampere frame. Breakers 15 through 100 amperes trip size
shall take up the same pole spacing. C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating.
2.6 SPACE ONLY
A. Where "space only" is noted on the drawings, provide necessary connectors, mounting brackets,
etc., for the future insertion of an overcurrent device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CIRCUITING
A. Special care shall be taken so that circuits are connected to the panels in such an arrangement as
to insure, insofar as possible, that loads on the different phases at the panel are balanced.
END OF SECTION
it
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 140
LUBBOCK, TEXAS WIRING DEVICES 16 140-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
i,
B. Grounding - Section 16450
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler -toggle) shall be of the A.C. general use
type for mounting in a single -gang spacing, fully rated 20 amperes minimum on inductive and
resistive loads at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL 20 Fifth Edition Standard snap Switches and further
requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single -pole, 3-way or 4-way, of the
maintained, momentary, or lock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any
position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of molded phenolic, urea or melamine
with cover of molded phenolic, urea or melamine. Fibre, paper or similar insulating material shall
not be used for body or cover. Ivory color handles unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Silver or silver alloy contacts. A.C. 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of
withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA Publication W131-1965, and shall be as follows unless
otherwise noted:
20A 120/277 AC Leviton
[
f
1 P 1221-1
2P 1222-1
3-way 1223-1
Lighted handle pilot light 1221-PL
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in
accordance with NEMA Publication WD1-1965, Part 3 and Part 10. Fire-resistant, non -absorptive,
hot -welded, phenolic composition or equal bodies and bases with metal plaster ears (integral with
the supporting member). Single or duplex as shown or noted on drawings. Ivory color unless
otherwise noted on the drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong.
B. Grounding Type: All receptacle shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment
ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated grounding jumper (based on Table
250-95 of the NEC with minimum size No. 14 AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall
be intemally connected to the receptacle mounting yoke.
C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be as follows:
20A - 125V AC 2P 3W Leviton 5362-1
F
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 140
LUBBOCK. TEXAS WIRING DEVICES 16 140-2
D. Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of duplex receptacle as specified above, mounted in a box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The
cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a short length of bead chain or shall be of
the spring hinged flap type.
E. Isolated grounding receptacles shall be the same NEMA configuration as 20A 125 volt receptacle
except that the grounding pole shall be isolated from the mounting strap and be colored orange
similar to Hubbell #1G5251 or 1G4262. Ground these devices by means of a separate green
equipment grounding conductor.
F. Special: Receptacles for special applications shall be as indicated on the drawings. For kitchen
equipment furnished under another section of the specifications, complete with cord set. This
Contractor shall verify exact requirements and furnish a matching receptacle where indicated.
G. Contactors: Lighting contactors shall be Westinghouse Class A202 or approved equal.
H. Photo Cells: Intermatic #K4121 120V or approved equal.
2.3 PLUG CAPS
A. Except for duplex receptacles, one matching plug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No
plug caps are required for duplex receptacles. Provide watertight, male plug caps in damp locations
or where exposed to weather.
2.4 DEVICE PLATES
A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet, and special
purpose outlet. Provide multi -gang outlet plates for multi -gang boxes. Plates on finished walls shall
be of stainless steel. Screws shall be metal with countersunk heads, in a color to match the finish
of the plate.
B. Exposed: Plates for exposed screw jointed fittings shall match the fittings with edges of plates flush
with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium plated steel with gasket. Plates for cast type boxes at
locations subject to wet or rain conditions shall be of the cast, vapor -tight type. Provide hinged lift
covers for devices. —
C. Communication: Plates for telephone and intercommunication have a 1/2 inch bushed opening in
the center.
D. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEVICE PLATES
A. Install with alignment tolerance of 1/16th inch and all edges in continuous contact with wall surfaces.
END OF SECTION
F
r
4
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 170
LUBBOCK TEXAS SWITCHES AND FUSES 16 170-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
B. Grounding - Section 16450
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES
A. 30 to 1200 Amperes
250 Volts Ac, Dc; 600 Volts Ac
2, 3 Poles
Fusible and Non -Fusible
Copper Terminals
Enclosures
NEMA 1 General Purpose
NEMA 3R Raintight
B. Furnish and install where indicated heavy duty type safety switches having the electrical
characteristics, ratings and modifications shown on the drawings.
C. All switches shall have NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless otherwise noted; metal
nameplates, front cover mounted, that contain a permanent record on switch type, catalog number
and Hp ratings (with both standard and time delay fuses); handle whose position is easily
recognizable and is padlockable in the "OFF" position; visible blades; reinforced fuse clips;
nonteasible, positive, quick make -quick break mechanisms; and switch assembly plus operating
handle as an integral part of the enclosure base.
D. Accepted manufacturers shall be Westinghouse, General Electric, and ITE. All other manufacturers
must submit substitution proposals for approval at least 7 days prior to the scheduled bid date.
2.2 FUSES
A. General: Dual element, time delay type, based on heavy service, Buss Fusetron or equal.
B. Current Limiting Fuses: Provide where indicated on the drawings. Feeder protection in conjunction
with fused switches, install NEMA Class L fuses sized 125% of load current or as required for
coordination. Current limiting high -interrupting capacity fuses coordinated with molded case circuit
breakers shall be fumished by the circuit breaker manufacturer.
C. Coordination: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide basic selective
protection and properly coordinate with the other associated protective equipment.
D. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 170 _
LUBBOCK, TEXAS SWITCHES AND FUSES 16 170-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION `
3.1 DISCONNECTING MEANS
A. Install in each location indicated on the drawings.
3.2 SPARE FUSES
A. Fumish one complete set of each size of current limiting fuse other than Fusetron, each size of
current limiting fuse installed for circuit breaker protection, and each size Fusetron fuse in excess
of 30 amperes. Also one spare set of each size high voltage fuses installed.
END OF SECTION _
7
` LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 450
LUBBOCK TEXAS GROUNDING 16 450-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
B. Raceways - Section 16110
C. Panelboards -Section 16134
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials, equipment and devices related to the grounding system are specified under other sections
of these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install two separate grounding systems; a service grounding system and an equipment grounding
system. The service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment and neutral
conductor shall be grounded in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further
indicated on the drawings or specified. Connect the two grounding systems together only at the
main service equipment and the secondary terminals or transformers creating separately derived
distribution systems, such as dry -type transformers.
3.2 SERVICE GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. General: The service grounding system is provided for the A.C. service neutral ground. Current
return conductors, such as neutrals of the service entrance, feeder circuits, and branch circuits, shall
not be used for equipment grounding. Care must be exercised to insure that neutral bars are not
bonded to the enclosures of panelboards, motor control centers, or switchboards, which are not part
of the main service equipment. Except for separately derived systems, the neutral conductors shall
be grounded only in the main service equipment.
B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point in the main service equipment by
interconnecting the insulated neutral bus (or bar), the uninsulated equipment ground bus (or bar),
and service grounding electrode conductor.
l C. Neutral Disconnecting Means: Instatl a neutral disconnecting means in the main service equipment
for disconnecting and isolating the neutral bus from the common ground. This disconnecting means
may be disconnecting links in the interconnection between the insulated neutral and the uninsulated
equipment ground.
R
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 450
LUBBOCK, TEXAS GROUNDING 16 450-2
D. Neutral Bars: Provide an insulated neutral bar, separate from the uninsulated equipment ground
bar, in all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect
switches, cabinets, etc., which have neutral connections.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the minimum code
requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. The equipment ground (green
conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground of noncurrent -carrying metal parts of the wiring
system or apparatus connected to the system. The primary purpose of equipment grounding is to
provide greater safety by limiting the electrical potential between noncurrent -carrying parts of the
system, and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.
B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point as specified elsewhere in this section
of the specifications for interconnection of the equipment grounding system and the service
grounding electrode conductor.
C. Service Equipment Enclosure: Bond the enclosure of the main service equipment in the uninsulated
equipment ground bus (or bar) with a conductor or bar sized for 25% of the largest service
overcurrent device.
D. Ground Bar: Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any insulated neutral bar,
in all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches,
cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors.
The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus bar in switchboards, or a separately
mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure of other types of equipment. The ground
bar shall be adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure after thoroughly cleaning both surfaces
to assure good contact. Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor terminations.
Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment grounding bars as required for the
termination of equipment grounding conductors. In addition to the active circuits, provide pressure
connectors for all three phase spares and spaces.
E. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection to a metallic housing
of electrical equipment by means of lock nut and bushings provide ground bushing connected with
a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment. Metallic conduits containing
ground wiring only shall be bonded to the ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit. Install
grounding conductor in each non-metallic conduit or duct except those used for telephone, sound
or low -voltage signals, and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground conductor.
Bond the conductor at both ends in the equipment grounding system.
F. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor
for each single or three phase feeder and each branch circuit. Provide a separate green insulated
equipment grounding conductor for each single phase branch circuit. Install the required grounding
conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and/or neutral conductors and
connect to the box or cabinet grounding terminal. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more
than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor.
G. Devices: Install a minimum No. 12 green insulated equipment bonding conductor from a grounding
terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground terminal of all receptacles and
through flexible conduit to all light fixture housings.
H. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from the equipment
ground bar in the motor control center or separate starter through the conduit and flexible conduit
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 450
LUBBOCK TEXAS GROUNDING 16 450-3
to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on the motor. Install the grounding conductor
in the common conduit or raceway with the related circuit conductors.
3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Two service ground electrodes shall be utilized. One shall be the main cold water metallic water
piping system, and the other shall be a made electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of bare
copper conductor encased along the bottom of a concrete foundation footing which is in direct
contact with the earth (NEC 250-81 c). Make the connections to the cold water pipe inside the
building at the point of entrance. The grounding electrodes for separately derived systems shall be
r• approved for the application.
3.5 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. The grounding conductors for both service ground electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper,
sized in accordance with NEC 250-94, including the conductor for the made electrode. The
conductors shall be continuous without joint or splice, and shall be installed in conduit with the
conduit bonded to the conductor at each end. Install the conductor to permit the shortest and most
direct path, and terminate in the main service equipment on the common ground point. Equipment
grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors equivalent to the insulation on the
associated phase conductor, but not less than Type TW. The equipment grounding conductor or
straps shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder service serves a series of
panelboards or transformers, the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuous without
splices. Grounding conductors shall not be installed through metal -sheathed holes. All connections
shall be available for inspection and maintenance.
3.6 GROUND CONNECTIONS
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or clamps. If surface is coated, the coating
must be removed down to the bare metal. After the coating has been removed, apply a
non -corrosive approved compound to cleaned surface and install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing
is removed from metal, it shall be painted or touched up with "Galvanox".
3.7 TESTS
A. Test the completed grounding system with an ohmmeter at the service ground bar and submit a
written report to the Architect for approval. The service shall not be energized if the test shows
more than 5 ohms, unless approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
r
7
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 460
LUBBOCK TEXAS DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16 460-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor and material necessary to complete all installation
of dry -type transformers.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
II
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
B. Raceways - Section 16110
C. Conductors -Section 16120
,.. D. Grounding - Section 16450
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TRANSFORMERS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install copper wound dry type transformers as manufactured by
Sorgel Electric Corporation, or approved equal. Suppliers asking consideration as an approved
equal shall submit full guaranteed performance data on similar units in service for one or more
years. KVA ratings and voltages shall be as indicated on the electrical plans or schedule.
B. Single phase transformers through 10 KVA will not require taps, single phase transformers 15 KVA
through 25 KVA and three phase transformers 6 KVA through 15 KVA shall have a 2-5% full
capacity taps below normal rated primary voltage, all transformers 30 KVA and larger shall have
2-2-1/2% full capacity taps above and 4-2-1/2% full capacity taps below normal rated primary
voltage.
C. Transformers with the ratings through 25 KVA shall have either class B insulation and be designed
so that under full load the average conductor temperature does not exceed 80 degrees C rise, or
class H insulation and be designed so that under full load the average conductor temperature does
r
w.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 460
LUBBOCK TEXAS DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16 460-2
not exceed 115 degrees C rise. Transformers with ratings 30 KVA or larger shall be constructed
with class H insulation and so designed that under full load the average conductor temperature does
not exceed 80 degrees C rise.
D. Transformer coils must be vacuum impregnated with non -hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish, and
shall have a final wrap of electric insulating material designed to prevent injury to the magnet wire.
Transformers having coils with magnet wire visible will not be acceptable.
E. The core and coil shall be completely isolated from the enclosure by means of vibration absorbing
mounts. There shall be no metal to metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure.
On units 500 KVA and smaller the vibration isolating system shall be so designed as to provide for
continual securement of the core and coil unit to the enclosure. Sound isolating systems requiring
the removal of all tie down facilities will not be acceptable. Sound levels should not exceed the
following values: 0 to 30 KVA, 42 decibels - 45 KVA through 150 KVA, 45 decibels - 225 KVA and
300 KVA, 50 decibels - 500 KVA, 55 decibels. Certified test data on individual units shall be
submitted at the request of the Engineer without charge.
F. All ventilating openings shall be of the louvered type, expanded metal coverings will not be
accepted. The base of the transformer shall be constructed of twelve gauge steel minimum, with
stamped openings for ventilation.
G. Lifting eyes or provisions should be provided on all transformer enclosures, holes in the enclosure
requiring the use of spreader bars will not be acceptable. the transformer enclosure shall be
degreased, cleaned and phosphatized with one coat of zinc chromate primer and one coat of baked
enamel
H. The core and coils shall be visibly grounded to the frame of the transformer cubicle by means of
a flexible grounding strap of adequate size. A maximum case temperature shall not exceed 35
degrees centigrade rise above ambient at its warmest point.
3.2 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical or electrical
defects for one (1) year from date of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 600
LUBBOCK TEXAS LIGHTING 16 500-1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
B. Grounding - Section 16450
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special installation instructions,
photometric data, and descriptive literature. When fixtures are proposed for substitution and prior
approval has not been issued, the submittal for approval shall include catalog cuts of both the
specified and proposed fixtures. Catalog numbers shown on the Fixture Schedule are indicative of
the general type desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any manufacturer.
Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics and of
equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved by the Engineer. All fluorescent fixtures shall
be of the type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish all lighting fixtures throughout of the type indicated on the drawings, complete with lamps,
sockets, wiring, fitters, hangers, plaster rings, etc., as required.
A. Fluorescent: F32/T8/SPX41 unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
B. Incandescent: Inside frosted; extended service, 130 volt.
C. H.I.D.: Clear unless noted, Type 'T 'self -extinguishing. Universal burning lamps will not be
accepted.
D. Manufacturers: General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania.
2.3 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent: UL approved, high power factor with ETL certified CBM label, suitable for 120V
operation as required. Sound rating of "A" for interior installations. Ballasts shall be electronic type.
B. H.I.D.: One lamp type as required for the application. Suitable for use with H.I.D. lamps. Ballast
for exterior H.I.D. lamps shall be rated for -20 deg. F.
C. Manufacturers: Advance Mark III, General Electric MaxiMiser 1.
LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 600
LUBBOCK, TEXAS LIGHTING 16 500-2
2.4 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. All fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all
sections of the channel structure shall be securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted
in such a way that ballast hum will be amplified or transmitted into work areas.
B. Fluorescent fixtures indicated to have dual switching shall have the inboard lamps connected to one
ballast and the outboard lamps connected to the other ballast.
2.5 FINISH
A. Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to applying finish. Metal parts shall be
aluminum, brass, copper, bronze, or steel, with powder coat, post -fabrication baked white enamel
finish unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS
A. Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place, electrically and mechanically, permitting easy
insertion or removal of lamps. Provide corrosion resistant treated lamp pin contacts.
2.7 CEILING TRIM
A. Furnish proper ceiling frames for ceiling material in which recessed fixtures are to be installed.
Verify prior to ordering.
2.8 LENS
A. When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified, it shall be of 100% acrylic meeting American Society
for Testing Materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM
D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous sides panels and other luminous plastic members of
fixtures shall be made of not less than 0.156 inch thick prismatic Pattern 19 clear acrylic material.
Plastic shall be non-flammable or shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per
minute for a 1/2 inch width of the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the
naked eye either when subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM
D-795-44T (500 hours exposure, using type S-1 lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent
lamp source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be used.
The plastic shall be non -electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an anti -static wax.
2.9 HOUSING
A. Not less than 22 gauge steel with baked white enamel finish applied over corrosion- resistant primer
unless otherwise specifically approved.
2.10 EMERGENCY LIGHT BATTERY PACKS
A. Lighting fixtures so indicated on the drawings shall be provided with emergency lighting feature.
Components shall consist of a sealed nickel -cadmium battery and a solid state invertor, charger and
switch system. The components shall be self-contained within the fixture and be factory installed.
The rechargeable battery shall operate one lamp at an emergency level for a minimum of 90
minutes. The fixture shall be U.L. listed. System shall have a 5 year unconditional guarantee.
Units on switched circuits shall be wired such that the fixture can be switched off without causing
the emergency battery to operate. Units shall be Bodine B-50 or approved equal. Emergency
battery packs shall be included in the lighting data submittal.
r
h' LMCC
INTERIOR RENOVATION SECTION 16 500
LUBBOCK TEXAS LIGHTING 16 500-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUPPORTS
A. Support ceiling fixtures by anchorage to the ceiling only where the ceiling is concrete or masonry
units. Provide mounting angles on trapeze where required to support light fixtures between
structural members. No lighting fixtures, conduit or outlet boxes shall be supported from the building
sheet metal deck. Where lay -in construction is used, fixtures shall be on the lay -in type. Coordinate
supports for lay -in fixtures with Ceiling Contractor.
3.2 LOW DENSITY CEILING
A. Special attention is directed to the code restriction against mounting fluorescent fixtures on
combustible low -density cellulose fiberboard (NEC 410-76(6)). If fixtures are to be installed that are
not UL approved for this condition, a suitable mounting arrangement shall be developed which
meets the approval of the Engineer.
3.3 CEILING TRIM AND MEANS OF SUPPORT
A. The ceiling trim and means of support of recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with the type of
ceiling to be installed to insure proper installation.
3.4 BLOCKING
A. Protect housings of recessed lighting fixtures during installation of internal blocking or framing to
1 prevent distortion of sides or dislocation of threaded lugs which upon completion must be in perfect
alignment and match the corresponding holes in frames or rims so that holding screws can be
installed freely without forcing and remain so they can be easily removed when servicing. Threads
to receive holding screws shall be chased after plating and finishing to insure easy installation and
removal of knurled beaded screws by thumb pressure.
3.5 LAMP GUARDS
A. Provide safety guard clips on open type fluorescent fixtures to prevent lamps from falling.
3.6 CLEAN-UP
A. At final inspection, the fixtures and lighting equipment shall be in first class operating order, in
perfect condition as to finish, free from defects, completely lamped, clean and free from dust, plaster
or paint spots, and complete with the required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or other
components necessary to complete the fixtures.
3.7 LAMPS
A. Install new lamps in all lighting fixtures seven (7) days before building acceptance or beneficial
occupancy, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
I
7
r
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
F
i
F(TO BE INSERTED INTO THE SPECIAL CONDITIONS)
Substitutions
The materials, products and manufacturers described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of
required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. To be
approved, a proposed substitution must meet or exceed all express requirements of the Contract Documents.
No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received
by the Architect at least ten calendar days prior to the receipt of Bids. The burden of proof of merit of the
proposed substitution is upon the proposer. Such requests shall include the name of the material, product
or manufacturer for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution
including drawings, performance and test data. The Architect will give consideration to verified experience
records showing the reputation of the proposed product with previous user's, evidence of reputation of the
manufacturer for prompt delivery, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for efficiency in servicing its
products and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other
materials, products of manufacturers or other portions of the Work, including changE!s in the Work of other
contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The Architect's
decision of approval or disapproval on a proposed substitution shall be final. If the Architect approves a
proposed substitution prior to the receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders
shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. No substitutions will be considered after the Contract
award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
Bidder's Review of the Job Premises:
The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Drawings and Specifications with each other, and shall
examine the Job Premises and Existing "As -Built" Conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect any
errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the
Drawings and Specifications shall make a written request which shall reach the Architects at least seven
i calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Bidder's visits to the site are by appointment, only.
Contact: Lubbock Memorial Civic Center, Freddie Chavez 806-767-2238. or Vicki Key 806-767-2236 to
schedule site visits.
Event Coordination within the Lubbock Memorial Civic Center
The Lubbock Memorial Civic Center hosts national and local meetings, trade shows, conventions and related
activities. In anticipation of the renovation Work, openings in the Events Schedule are being "held" to
accommodate the major renovation efforts for this project. However, the Events shall take precedence over
the renovation activities and the work schedule of the Contractor must address these conditions.
The Contractor and the Lubbock Memorial Civic Center shall mutually coordinate event and rikQovation work
schedules to accomplish this project and minimize disturbance to event activity. The Contrac may be
required, due to prior event commitments of the Civic Center, to alter his desired construction schedu16:_,lt
is envisioned the work can be scheduled to avoid such conflicts. It is the intent of this project to accomplish
the greatest amount of renovation work during the months of November and December 1996, with
opportunities to begin Work in the Meeting Rooms and the Terrace Suite as early as October 1996. The
Lubbock Memorial Civic Center is open 24 hours a day and seven days each week. The Contractor may
perform his work during any period of the day provided it is coordinated with the Civic Center's Events
Schedule. The Contractor should consider multiple shift work to complete the majority of the renovation work
within this available time frame where the event schedule is reduced. Contractor shall receive prior Owner
approval to conduct work beyond hours of Building Security.
A complete listing of the tentative and firm Events scheduled at the Lubbock Memorial Civic Center within the
recommended period of the renovation work between October, November and December 1996 is attached.
This schedule is subject to change and is provided for general information in determining the number and
locations of scheduled events during the proposed renovation period.
r
1, .
Movement of Furniture. Furnishings and Equipment
The Lubbock Memorial Civic Center shall provide labor and supervision to move all loose equipment and
furnishings presently located in the areas to be part of the renovation work. All existing artwork shall be
removed by the Owner during periods of construction.
Use of Meeting Rooms. Docks and Elevators
The Civic Center shall make meeting room space, not used for events, available to the Contractor to assist
in the storage of materials to be installed. Loading Docks shall be made available to the Contractor,
coordinated with Civic Center Event requirements, for the unloading of new materials and disposal of
demolished materials. Contractor's use of Freight and Passenger Elevators needs to be scheduled with the
Owner at times during events. Contractor will be allowed full access to elevators when events are not
scheduled. Proper protection material must be in place during elevator use. Construction debris and
materials shall be removed from elevators and cab surfaces left clean.
Cleaning and Maintenance
The Contractor shall store all construction equipment and materials in the designated storage area as
determined by the Owner. During periods between demolition and construction work and at the end of each
work day, the Contractor shall leave the job premises broom clean and remove all waste and staged
installation materials from areas to be occupied by the events activities as they are scheduled.
The Contrator shall cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and
facilitate Owner usage. During periods where the Work sequence is interrupted by a scheduled event, the
Contractor shall remove construction material, clean and restore the area to an acceptable condition of
operation as determined by the Owner. The Contractor shall schedule in advance with the Owner, certain
operations which generate high levels of noise, dust, or toxic air pollutants which may cause disruption to
event activities.
Installation of Owner Furnished Items
Axminster Carpet is Owner Furnished for material and delivery to job premises. Contractor Costs for
receiving, inspection, handling, storage and installation are to be included in the Base Bid. The Bidder shall
visit the job premises and, based upon "as built conditions" for locations to receive Axminster Carpet per the
Contract Documents, estimate the total material quantity required for the carpet installation, including waste,
for each Axminster Carpet type and submit the following completed schedule:
SCHEDULE FOR BIDDER'S ESTIMATED QUANTITIES
Bidder to complete the following Schedule using the Bidder's material quantities required for project including material for installation,
replacement stock, testing. Bidder to furnish Unit and Total Cost to Include costs for receiving, handling, storage and installation of Owner
Furnished Material. ( This schedule does not Include material costs for Owner Furnished Material):
CARPET TYPE
BIDDER'S
5%
Additional
TOTAL
BIDDER'S
BIDDER'S
Total Material
Replacement
Material for
Sq. Yds.
UNIT PRICE
EXTENDED
Quantities
Stock
Testing
FOR
per Sq. Yd. for
TOTAL COST
For Installation,
PROJECT
Receiving,
Square Yards
Including Waste
(Square
12 Ft. x 12 Ft.
Inspection,
x Unit Cost
(Square Yards)
Yards)
(Square Yards)
Handling,
Storage and
Installation
C-1 Pedestrian
16
$
$
Mall
C-2 Solid
16
$
$
Bonier
C-3 Banquet
16
$
$
Hall- A
C-4 Banquet
16
$
$
Hall- B
C-5 Banquet
16
$
$
Hall- C
C-6 Carpet Base
16
$
$
TOTAL
96
$
$
REVISED 6/2.6/96
Mall s-- --jj
StOftiviatict-11- Banquet Hall 11 Pxhlblt Hall.- North Pod Mail 11' East a South West Theater Rms 10
2
3
........ ........
7
S.
8
9
MRLEY
lo
Lions L unch
- ----- ---- -
3
. . . . . . . . . . . .
12
77
—13
14
Dance
15
16
ispanic Chambe
17
Lions Lunch
18
Chamber
19
Golden Spur
20
Golden Spur
adh
21
Rock Mtn Elks
.................. ................ ............... ..... ......... . . . . . . . . .
22
S.
23
1
24
Lions Lunch
is
25
26
ftiz
27
0* 0
It'110V
0
29 . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Rms 104-107
Meaanlne
OCTOBER -. I[ Banquet Hall 11 Exhibit hall11 North Ped Mall 11 East -Mall �� South Mall 11 West Mail �� Ther
1
3
4
5
6::
Lions Lunch
Parkridge Preg
F
India /
tax
8
Lions Lunch
{
9
10 -
Volley Bah
11
_ Volley Ban
12
pllvt€gltil ;
Volley Ball
13
14
County Judges
County Judges
County_
15
Volley all
County Judges
County Judges_
Counl�
16
Volley Bell
Counter Judges
County Judges
County
17
>
County Judges
Coun Judges
County_
18
.:: .
r�
Texas Nurses
Texas Nurses
Texas I
19
Texas Nurses
Texas Nurses
Texas I
20
ttrsiftttii
..
Texas Nurses
Texas Nurses
Texas I
21
.�
22
Lions Lunch
23
24W.
WIN"
II
25
_
His Way Prod
26
Credit Union
gospe
27
Youth Symphony
outh Sy
28
ISD College Nit
._..._..... _
ISD College Nit
_.
ISD College Nit
ISD College Nit
29
Lions Lunch
30
31
_LAI
EJ
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
•
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
4-7
11-12 RENOV
...:....,..
UN
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
•
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
ENO
ENa ENO
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
••
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
•
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
.
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
NOVEMBE
I
2
A-6
11
i2'
AA
1-7
-18
it
20
22
23
24
26
id
27
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENM
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENM
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
REM
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
REM
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENM
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
= : :° «::::.
RENM
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
REM
.RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO�
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
REM
RENOV
'f •:
RENM
RENOV
.•. .. .•
RENO%
RENOV
•.:+
... .. ?
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV'
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV"
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENM
RENO%
RENOVI�ir�jh�V
i'�il!I�i !,
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENM
-RENOV
EN
RENO�
RENOV
RENM
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENO%
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOU
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
:-
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
-
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
IRMII•'
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
°: i y
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV�
RENOV
�` `
re : "
RENOV
RENOV
M.-f
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV.
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV-
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
z w:.'
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
�,„�
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
1
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
'
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
uL
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV.
RENOV
WWI
RENOV
.�Via:..:M
RENOV RENOV
= • :,
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
R E WOW
1. Mih,,! �'Ib " G
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
fli�ii
�,�d' . d ,li PiG
RENOV RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
• •
•
RENOV
RENOV
• •
•
RENOV
OAPTA=
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
nuffil
a
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
�b
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV•
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
E44OV—
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
LRLi!&ZX71AZ!•
RENOV
7MM. W.
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
7REN7OV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
RENOV
FthritikkY - 11 "pan tkii 11 k 11
Exhibit Hall North Pod Mall
2
3
4
LIONS
5
-TA66-
6
...... .. ...
IN
7
6
16
11
LIONS
12
13
._M tique S.ho w
14
Anhgue§!mt
PIKE FES
15
Antigua.
ShP�
. . . . .
16
An"ue Show
PIKE FEST
17
LIONS
19
20
21
II
22
23
24
25
DONS
26
27
28
East .Mall, )j.
iouch'Mi"'a-11 11
WelitMall-
Theater,
dl--ifmi -11
. 1-2- 11
TS—mminin-i
BRIDAL Show
BRIDAL Show
BRIDAL Show
BRIDAL Show
BRIDAL Show
BRIDAL Show
BRIDAL Show
BRIDAL Show
Syrup. Rehearse
.p. Rehearse
p. Rehearse
Symp. RehearseI
Methodist Music
Methodist Music
Methodist Musk,
Methodist Music
Methodist music
Methodist Music
Methodist Music
a
MARCH 'B** -a nq-u'e-t'-Hall" 11 -Exhibit 'H' a tI.-- N—o-ft- -P-e--d-Mall East Mall— ]f Rms 164407 1 M1 08-11firfiFu-9 South a -West mall eater RrIp.101403 - - . 11._.!t __ � ... -
Methodist Music
2
TTU Cont Edu.
TTU Cont Edu.
TTU Coot Edu.
LYSO
TTU Cont Edu.
TTU Cont Edu.
3
TTU Cont Edu.
TTU Cont Edu.
TTU Cont Edu.
TTU Cont Edu.
TTU Cont Edu.
_4'
Jj;6 Cont Edu.
TTU Cont C_o_nt_Edu _
_TrU Cont Mr.
TTU Cont Edu,
TTU Cont Edu.
6
b Christian Sct
9'
10L.
11
LIONS
..... .....Ir
12
13
Cork & Fork
14
id*
i-M Footban,
17
L10- S
N
19
10,
21
22
23
24
MRLEY
25
LIONS
MRLEY
26
WORLEY
27
28
rru vo�n
29
TTU Volff
to
TM Volle
. yball
31